construction / design standards general - beaumont services

Standard No. Standard Name Current Revision Date

Previous Revision Date

Revision Summary Author

00 00 00 Introduction 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. Jherschelman

01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. Jherschelman

01 42 00Design Documents Information Requirements 10/17/11 9/8/10 Added1.01.8.q) 1.02.9.x)11.v) 13.t) 1.03.9.y)

11.y) 13.u), Updated Standard No.Jherschelman

01 91 00General Commissioning Requirements 10/17/11 10/2/08 1.03, D, #5, Updated Standard No. Sfox,

Jherschelman

01 91 01 Commissioning Steps 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. Jherschelman

01 91 02 Asset Tagging List 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. Jherschelman

01 91 03 Contractor Installed Equipment Input Form 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. Jherschelman

Construction / Design StandardsGeneral

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System, LLC.

DESIGN / CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES & STANDARDS GENERAL

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System, LLC. DESIGN / CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES & STANDARDS GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Section – Index 00 00 00 - Introduction ...................................................................................................... 1

01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements................................................................................ 2

01 42 00 - Design Documents Information Requirements................................................. 3

01 91 00 - General Commissioning Requirements............................................................ 4

01 91 01 - BSC Commissioning Steps .............................................................................. 4

01 91 02 - BSC Asset Tagging List ................................................................................... 4

01 91 03 - Contractor Installed Equipment Input Form...................................................... 4

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS

SECTION 00 00 00 - INTRODUCTION

00 00 00 Introduction Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

1.01 Mission Statement

To identify specific materials, systems and/or construction methods that are required for consistent facility value.

To ensure that the Beaumont Health System facilities are designed,

engineered and constructed with materials and systems that provide optimum value thru a combination of first cost, long-term cost and quality.

To provide a forum for the introduction of new building materials and systems,

and a forum to change building materials and systems.

o Introduction may be made by: Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System Staff Design Professionals Construction Professionals Suppliers/Vendors

To publish the agreed upon standards and guidelines in a form easily

understood by architects, engineers, contractors and JLL@BHS staff. 1.02 Introduction

Set forth in these documents are standards and guidelines intended to serve as design and construction criteria for the Beaumont Health System facilities. As such, they reflect the planning, design, construction, and maintenance expertise of JLL@BHS personnel and consultants This information is to be applied to all renovation and new construction from the very first planning and design stages through actual construction and facilities maintenance and management. The information included within each section contains procedures to be followed, materials to be used, or design guidelines which we have found to be appropriate to assure the quality desired now and through our future maintenance of these facilities. Facilities personnel, as well as outside architects, consultants, and contractors, should become familiar with these standards and guidelines.


SECTION 00 00 00 - INTRODUCTION

00 00 00 Introduction Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

1.03 Scope of the Standards

The standards included herein shall serve as a code of quality for all design, construction, and maintenance procedures and projects. The level of quality deemed by any one standard is determined on the basis of reliability, serviceability, safety, and cost (including design, construction, inventory, operating, and maintenance costs). The information contained in these standards is not specific to any one project, but common to all.

1.04 A Dynamic Document

Standards from all areas of design, construction and maintenance are continually being developed. This document is a "living" document keeping abreast of new and better procedures or materials as we become aware of them. To this end, JLL@BHS Policy 204, Maintenance of Design & Construction Guidelines, has been established to provide a mechanism by which the document can be update as the need arises.

1.05 Standards Versus Specifications

These standards and guidelines shall form the basis from which to create drawings and specifications. All of the concepts and procedures included are for the use of Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System contracted designers, consultants and contractors. The use and inclusion of these standards in bid documents does not relieve the consultant or architect of the responsibility and legal liability for any bid documents created from these standards.

1.06 Availability

These standards are developed and maintained by the Facilities Engineering Section of Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health Systems, L. L. C, 30963 Woodward Avenue, Royal Oak, Michigan 48073, Julia Herschelman, telephone 248-551-3632. We appreciate any feedback you would like to give on the content or format of the standards.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 01 41 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 1

1.01 General

A. All codes, rules, regulations, guidelines, requirements, etc. which are used or referenced in the preparation of documents, and/or are required to be complied with by the Agencies Having Jurisdiction, shall be listed on the drawings or in the specifications of the project documents. The years and editions of these shall be accurately noted in reference to the respective time frame of the project.

B. Included on the drawings or in the specifications of the project documents

will also be the following information:

1. Building Occupancy Classification 2. Building Construction Type 3. Building Elements Listings including the hour ratings and assembly

designation 4. Building Seismic Criteria and Classification 5. Finish Material Ratings

C. Also included, for record and future reference, on the drawings or in the

specifications of the project documents, shall be any granted variances or exceptions from any of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Inclusion of these in the record documents will ensure that they can be easily found, when the need arises, after the project is completed.

D. All projects, in health care occupancies, will be designed to the 2000

NFPA 101 Life Safety Code to meet JCAHO and CMS requirements. These occupancies will include health care, ambulatory health care and business as defined by Joint Commission, CMS and NFPA.

E. All Projects in occupancies that will provide patient care, and fall under the

jurisdiction of Joint Commission, will be designed to the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities. These occupancies will include health care, ambulatory health care and business as defined by Joint Commission, CMS and NFPA.

F. The Design Kick-Off Checklist that is issued with each project lists all of

the usual rules and regulations that should be followed. This is not to be construed as a complete listing nor does it release the professional preparing and/or sealing the documents from complying with regulatory requirements not noted in this checklist.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 01 42 00 – DESIGN DOCUMENTS INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS

01 42 00 Design Documents Information Requirements Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 20

1.01 Schematic Design Minimum Requirements

A. The purpose of the Schematic Design is to interpret the program data provided and produce a design that will satisfy all program requirements. It also must clarify the program, identify program oversights or excesses, and generally verify that the proposed program is functionally and fiscally feasible from an overall Building and Campus perspective. By the end of the Schematic Design all program issues should not have, or show, any unassigned spaces (other than shell space not being built out as part of the project). Any such spaces shown in the original program are anticipated to have been designated and resolved by the completion of Schematic Design. In addition, Schematic Design must resolve all break-through, phasing and renovation issues associated with the work.

B. It should be noted that space allocations for infrastructure are a required

basic part of the program. These spaces require vertical walk in shafts for mechanical and electrical distribution in the facility. In the past, there has been a proclivity with maximizing net assignable square footage for end users versus maintaining infrastructure allowances within the overall gross square footage. This ultimately has had a detrimental effect on the long-term functioning and future flexibility of some facilities. Health Care Facilities require generous provisions, with built-in allowances for future growth, for mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Design philosophy must recognize this and adjust accordingly in the schematic development stages of a structure so as to maintain the minimum shaft and mechanical/electrical spaces programmed for this facility. Any proposed encroachment of User program square footage, into these infrastructure spaces must have JLL@BHS approval before proceeding.

C. The following represents the minimum deliverables required for Schematic

Design review and approval. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will not be reviewed or approved:

1. Program Reconciliation must be provided in a tabular format (Excel

Format). This document will list each individual space, including circulation and shafts, indicating original program square footage, schematic design square footage, any variance square footage and a brief narrative description explaining the need for the variance. A detailed operational narrative with room-by-room descriptions is also required as an output of Schematic Design.



2. Specifications in outline format including a narrative and descriptions of materials, finishes and proposed MEP systems. Note that the use of variable air volume systems will require a detailed economic cost evaluation by the A/E. These specifications shall also include a detailed listing of all applicable codes and any seismic requirements. Narratives shall include how design will provide accessibility to utility systems for service, maintenance and future remodeling.

3. CADD Requirements: All drawings and electronic files delivered to

JLL@BHS shall follow JLL@BHS CADD Standards. 4. Integrated Systems Study: Show through various key building

sections how structural, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical systems are to be coordinated and layered for physical fit, installation and accessibility for maintenance.

5. Site Requirements:

a) Existing Conditions Civil Survey, b) Parking locations, c) Site entrance, d) New building entrance, e) Temporary entrances and site circulation, fencing, roadways,

parking, lighting, signs, f) Building foot print, g) Demolition, h) Existing site utilities, i) New site utility requirements, j) Walkway locations, k) Any future expansion capabilities, l) Landscaping demolition, m) Roadways and drive, n) Storm Water Management criteria, o) Proposed location of any new underground utilities.

6. Building Exterior Envelope:

a) Elevations of each side of the building addition including partial elevation of the existing building

b) Building cross sections c) Exterior proposed wall details and sections d) Detailed wall sections at each type of window e) Roof layout f) Elevations and sections of proposed atriums, garden courts,

etc.



7. Structural: a) Structural scheme, b) Building frame and sizing of major components, c) Description of seismic analysis and methods to be

employed, d) Canopy entrance framing, e) Shoring requirements, f) Stair details, g) Special requirements to protect existing structure, h) Typical floor framing requirements.

8. Building Floor Plans: a) Floor plans of each floor with column grid designations

drawn at 1/8” of ¼” scale, b) Indicate area use and square footage c) Locations of vertical infrastructure shafts d) Layouts of all spaces including room names e) Circulation paths f) Layouts of surgical rooms at a larger scale with major items

of equipment shown g) Show flexibility for building expansion h) All floor plans show at least the two most adjacent bays of

the adjacent building i) Full floor plans showing project location and a minimum of

any required building separations, and smoke barriers, existing and new

j) Show all service support spaces such as janitors closets, electrical closets, mechanical shafts, soiled and clean utility rooms, public and staff toilet rooms

k) Elevators and elevator equipment rooms l) Pneumatic tube station location(s) m) Interior partition types n) Include major pieces of equipment o) Legend of symbols and abbreviations p) Indicate what Barrier Free provisions are being provided. q) Locate required fire extinguishers. Verify travel distances

are compliant with code.

9. Plumbing Plans: a) Location of all plumbing systems risers, b) Using the Facilities CADD one line diagram of all medical

gases systems determine and show proposed points of new connections to these systems. Provide calculations indicating the adequacy or inadequacy of existing risers,



c) All fixtures and their location, d) Show suggested routing of all piping mains vertically and

horizontally. e) Routing of roof drainage systems. f) Location of storm and sanitary pumps. g) Location of roof overflow outlets at grade. Specific care

should be taken to locate these so that they do not flow across pedestrian walks and paths.

10. HVAC Plans:

a) Mechanical Room plans showing major pieces of equipment such as air handlers, converters, pumps, condensate lift stations, etc.

b) Block Load calculations including dew point calculations for all window types

c) Main duct risers & proposed routing of duct mains on the floor,

d) One line flow diagrams all systems such as ventilation air, chilled water, heating hot water, steam and condensate,

e) Air intake and discharge locations. f) Perimeter heating systems indicating where radiant panels

and finned tube will be used. g) Preliminary sections in mechanical rooms, h) Mechanical legend of symbols and abbreviations, i) Statement of design intent including winter and summer

design conditions. j) Investigation of diesel exhaust plume and air intakes

(existing and new)

11. Electrical Plans: a) Tabulation of lighting source proposed, and required foot-

candles, per type of area b) Fixture types per established JLL@BHS Standard c) Electrical equipment room plans showing location of all

major pieces of equipment d) Investigation of existing normal and emergency power

system to determine spare capacity e) One line diagrams of normal and emergency power

distribution systems and how the new work will integrate with the existing Campus and building distribution systems

f) Electrical closet locations g) Electrical legend of symbols and abbreviations, coordinated

with JLL@BHS CADD Standards, Data/Communications-determine, and indicate point of origin



h) Estimated load calculations for normal and emergency power

i) Details of emergency generator location j) Fire Command Center location k) Plan for redundant emergency supply to OR’s l) Identification of special electrical components and their

location: UPS, TVSS, harmonic filters, power factor correction capacitors.

m) Interview users for specific UPS, data, communication and emergency power requirements.

1.02 Design Development Minimum Requirements

A. Design Development should not proceed until the JLL@BHS Project manager has provided formal approval. This approval will not be given until all Schematic Design review comments have been responded to by the A/E. At the completion of Schematic Design all program space relationships, adjacencies, and square footage requirements are viewed as fixed and only minor programmatic revisions will be allowed. The JLL@BHS Project Manager must approve, in writing, any requested revisions that have a cost/budget or schedule impact before proceeding.

B. A properly prepared set of Design Development documents should

resolve all major conflicts and interference’s between disciplines and various trades work. To this end it is anticipated that the documents submitted for review in Design Development will represent approximately 60% completed Construction Documents. Plans and specifications for sitework, foundation, structure, and shell will be 100% complete at this time for early bid packages. Specifications for major long lead equipment such as elevators, air handling units, emergency generators, electrical substations, switch gear and paralleling gear will be 100% complete for a possible early bid package.

C. The following represents the minimum deliverables required for Design

Development review and approval. It is the Architect/Engineer’s responsibility to meet these requirements within the time frames published in the project’s schedule. Submittals that do not meet these requirements will not be reviewed or approved and will be required to be re-submitted with all required information within the project scheduled time frames. Schedule extensions for incomplete submittals will not be granted.



1. Program Reconciliation must be provided in a tabular format (Excel Format). This document will list each individual space or room (including circulation and shafts) indicating original program square footage, schematic design, square footage, any variance square footage with a brief narrative description explaining the need for the variance that occurred in Design Development. A revised operational narrative should also be included.

2. Specifications shall be representative of the final construction

specification to the extent that they shall relay full design intent establishing levels of materials quality, criteria for installation of material and systems. Equipment specifications shall be reasonably complete.

3. Clarifications: Submit a written narrative indicating areas or details

that the A/E would like to receive clarification or direction on how to proceed.

4. Equipment Planning: All equipment planning shall be complete with

detailed room by room descriptions listing all 5. CADD Requirements: All drawings and electronic files delivered to

JLL@BHS shall follow JLL@BHS CADD Standards. 6. Site and Civil Work: 100% complete for early bid packages. It

should be understood that if early bid packages for this work are to be issued before Design Development then the requirements that follow are to be submitted with the Schematic Design Review Package. a) Completed survey of the existing site showing all existing

conditions, underground utilities and easements. b) All site drawings shall be drawn at a scale of 1”=30’-0” c) Site Drawing showing demolition d) Site Drawing showing all new utility work with all utilities that

are to be demolished removed from this drawing. Only those existing utilities that are to remain and new utility work are to be shown

e) Site Drawings with all new grading requirements, roadways, and drives, walkways etc.

f) Temporary entrances and canopies g) Site storm water drainage requirements with calculations h) Building foot print i) In process Landscaping plans showing planting layout,

landscape lighting and proposed irrigation plan



7. Building Exterior Envelope

a) Fully detailed and dimensioned elevations of each side of the building. These drawings shall indicate all future expansion capabilities.

b) Completed Building Sections c) Full Details and sections of all window types d) Large scale canopy entrance plan and associated details e) Fully detailed exterior wall sections, particular attention

should be given to waterproofing, vapor barriers, and insulation

f) Roof plan showing all roof mounted equipment and roof penetrations.

8. Structural

a) Fully detailed plans of building frame and structure b) Clear description of seismic requirements c) Shoring requirements full detailed. d) Canopy entrance framing e) Floor framing requirements f) Structural details at all breakthroughs into the existing

buildings. g) Foundations drainage requirements h) Completed stair details i) All miscellaneous steel requirements j) Design Loads k) Special framing requirements for infrastructure shafts and

grating l) Show all detailing with respect to future expansion

capabilities m) Column grid designations

9. Building Floor Plans

a) Cover Sheet b) Drawing List c) Composite of Fire and Smoke zones complete with locations

of all rated walls d) ¼” scale plans of each floor with column grid designations e) Include all room names and Facilitech System Room

numbers f) Interior room dimensions g) Large scale plans and details including special finishes in

public areas



h) Large scale detailed plans of operating rooms, patient rooms and support spaces

i) Equipment and furniture layouts. j) Show millwork k) Interior wall elevations showing placement of medical gas

and electrical outlets l) Millwork elevations and details m) Door Schedule n) Door frame types and details o) Room Finish schedule p) Reflected ceiling plans with all devices such as sprinkler

heads, lighting, exit signs, and fire alarm devices. q) Partition types and details r) Fire ratings of walls and smoke zones s) Elevator details and finishes t) Plans and details of areas to be remodeled in the existing

building u) Access to roofs v) Expansion joint details and locations w) Miscellaneous supports systems for ceiling mounted

equipment x) Show locations of fire extinguishers.

10. Plumbing Plans

a) Revised and updated one line diagrams of medical gas systems including revised final calculations

b) Riser diagrams of domestic hot and cold water c) Riser diagrams of waste and vent systems with fixture

counts d) Floor plans with all plumbing systems laid out e) Completed roof and under ground drainage systems f) All fixtures and their locations g) Domestic hot water heating equipment h) Piping schematic diagrams i) Storm and Sanitary Sump Pump Details j) Location of medical gas alarms and zone valves. k) Location of roof overflow outlets at grade

11. HVAC Plans

a) Mechanical Room Plans with all equipment and piping shown

b) Updated and revised load calculations including finalized dew point calculations



c) Air handling unit duct riser diagrams with all required dampers and cfm requirements at each floor branch main takeoff

d) Floor plans with duct layouts and terminal devices. Indicate on plans with screen symbolism areas beneath ductwork that are to be kept free of all other utilities in order to maintain access to fire/smoke dampers, valves, etc.

e) HVAC piping plans f) Pneumatic tube system piping plans g) Perimeter heating plans with piping for radiant ceiling panels

and finned tube radiation h) Updated statement of design intent i) Detailed sections of mechanical room j) Large scale plans of mechanical shafts at each floor k) One line flow diagrams of chilled water, heating hot water,

steam and condensate l) Temperature control diagrams with sequence of operation

and detailed points listing m) Duct details n) Fire/smoke/combination damper details o) Equipment schedules with clear delineation of present and

future capacity requirements p) Steam PRV location and details q) All equipment details r) Demonstrate with composite sections that HVAC, plumbing,

fire protection and electrical disciplines are coordinated for physical fit, service and accessibility for maintenance.

s) Show location of all duct-balancing dampers on plans. Standard details or notes will not be acceptable

t) Show on plans the location of all required piping balancing valves for all HVAC piping diagrams

u) Show locations of temperature control panels and VFD’s v) Show wall ratings on base plans for HVAC to verify fire and

smoke damper locations.

12. Fire Protection a) Floor plans with layouts of all sprinkler piping and head

locations with preliminary hydraulic calculations

13. Electrical Plans a) Lighting plan of all floors b) Light level calculations c) Fixture switching/layout d) Electrical equipment plans and details



e) All distribution, lighting and receptacle panel locations with designations as determined by JLL@BHS Facilities Management

f) Power and signal floor plans showing locations of receptacle and data/communications outlets

g) Site electrical plans-underground conduit/ducts, lighting, signs, security, gates and illuminated signs

h) Communication riser diagrams i) Normal and Emergency power riser diagrams j) Normal and Emergency power one line diagrams k) Panelboard schedules, including present and future load

capacities l) Fire alarm floor plans showing locations of required devices m) MCC locations and details of equipment served n) Fire alarm riser diagram o) Nurse call system layout p) Paging and music systems q) Control Diagrams r) Show main conduit runs for all conduits 2” and larger s) Lighting fixture schedule t) Show wall ratings on fire alarm plans u) Show special electrical components and their location: UPS,

TVSS, harmonic filters, power factor correction capacitors. v) Verify users specific UPS, data, communication and

emergency power requirements and show the system locations.

1.03 Minimum Construction Drawings and Specification Requirements:

A. Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System sets high standards and goals not only for itself but also for the consultants and contractors it employs. Our Client, Beaumont Health System, is a Health Industry Leader in providing the highest possible quality Health Care Services to its patients. One of the many ways this is accomplished is by constructing high quality facilities. The Essence of the Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System is to provide “Excellence in Environments that Help to Heal” and with this in mind JLL@BHS sets high standards of quality, goals and expectations. One of these expectations is that final construction documents prepared by the A/E of Record are to be well executed, highly detailed and complete in every way. A goal that follows from this expectation is a difficult one. We as a team need to strive to produce a set of construction documents that will reduce, if not eliminate, the issuance of any bulletins to correct errors and omissions after bids are received and contracts have been awarded. It is further recognized that



we are all human and that errors will occur, but our goal, as a team is to strive and extend our collective abilities to reduce the number of bulletins to zero. Bulletins are expensive and make budget management extremely difficult. The budget for this project is fixed and it is the project team’s responsibility to meet this budget without sacrificing the quality of the facility to be constructed.

B. In preparing the construction documents the A/E needs to consider the above and what internal quality control changes will be required. When submitting final construction documents for review the A/E must consider that they are to be 100% complete (bid Ready) in all respects. Completeness and thoroughness of the documents are critical to the success of this project. Construction documents will be critically reviewed by JLL@BHS. Documents that are incomplete, or poorly coordinated, will be returned to the A/E until they are deemed ready for review and bidding. There will be no schedule extensions given for submittal of documents that are incomplete or poorly coordinated bid documents.

C. The following represents the minimum deliverables required for Final Construction Documents:

1. Previous review Comment Response; the A/E shall include a

complete written response to all JLL@BHS Design Development review comments. The A/E shall include and indicate any areas or details that vary from Design Development and may require further clarification.

2. Program Reconciliation must be provided in a tabular format (Excel

Format). This document will list each individual space or room (including circulation and shafts) indicating original program square footage, Schematic Design, square footage, Design Development Square footage, any variance square footage with a brief narrative description explaining the need for the variance that occurred in preparation of Final Construction Documents. A revised and final operational narrative should also be included.

3. Specifications; .all specifications are to be 100% complete and shall

include (for reference & coordination) all specification sections that were issued with earlier bid packages. Equipment, manufactures and model number shall not vary or be changed from those approved in Design Development.

4. Equipment Planning; include all complete room data sheets.



5. CADD requirements; include a CD of all drawing files of bid documents including specifications.

6. Site and Civil Work: 100% complete. It is understood that if early

bid packages for this work are to be issued before Final CD Review then the requirements that follow are to be submitted with the Design Development Review Package. a) Completed survey of the existing site showing all existing

conditions, underground utilities and easements. b) All site drawings shall be drawn at a scale of 1”=30’-0” c) Site Drawing showing all necessary demolition d) Site Drawing showing all new utility work with all utilities that

are to be demolished removed from this drawing. Only those existing utilities that are to remain and new utility work are to be shown. All underground utilities are to be clearly labeled complete with sizes of piping and conduits.

e) Site Drawings with all new grading requirements, roadways, and drives, walkways etc.

f) Site drawings are to be clearly defined showing details of curbing, expansion joints in roadways & sidewalks, manhole details, piping details, etc.

g) Site storm water drainage requirements complete with calculations and drawings

h) Building foot print i) 100% complete Landscaping plans showing planting layout,

landscape lighting, irrigation plan, guying details, existing tree protection, planting details and soil preparation specifications.

j) Coordinated site signage plan and any special requirements.

7. Building Exterior Envelope a) Fully detailed and dimensioned elevations of each side of

the building. These drawings shall indicate all future expansion capabilities.

b) Completed Building Sections c) Full Details and sections of all window types detailing

flashing, waterproofing, insulation and caulking requirements at sills heads and jambs

d) Large scale canopy entrance plan and associated details of all building entrances

e) Fully detailed exterior wall sections, particular attention should be given to waterproofing, vapor barriers, and insulation



f) Roof plan showing all roof mounted equipment and roof penetrations.

g) Roofing installation details including curbs, flashing requirements, etc.

h) Exterior door details i) Typical exterior wall sections with clear indication installation

of insulation and vapor barriers j) Building Elevations should show any planned exterior

signage to be mounted on the building.

8. Structural a) Fully detailed plans of building frame and structure b) Clear description of seismic requirements c) Shoring requirements full detailed on drawings d) Canopy entrance framing e) Floor framing requirements f) Structural details at all breakthroughs into the existing

buildings. g) Beam and Column schedules h) Foundation details i) Floor loading design load requirements clearly defined j) Foundations drainage requirements and lower level, under

slab drainage k) Completed stair details l) All miscellaneous steel requirements m) Design Loads n) Special framing requirements for infrastructure shafts and

grating o) Show all detailing with respect to future expansion

capabilities p) Column grid designations q) If concrete structural systems are used show on plan, and

fully detail, all embedded items such as Unistrut to facilitate installation of MEP systems and other equipment

9. Building Floor Plans

a) Cover Sheet b) Drawing List c) Composite of Fire and Smoke zones complete with locations

of all rated walls d) ¼” scale plans of each floor with column grid designations e) Include all room names and Facilitech System Room

numbers f) Interior room dimensions



g) Large scale plans and details including special finishes in public areas

h) Large scale detailed plans of operating rooms, patient rooms and support spaces

i) Equipment and furniture layouts. j) Show millwork k) Interior wall elevations showing placement of medical gas

and electrical outlets l) Millwork elevations and details m) Door and hardware schedules n) Door frame types and details o) Room Finish schedules p) Reflected ceiling plans showing and coordinating all devices

such as sprinkler heads, lighting, exit signs, and fire alarm devices.

q) Partition types and details r) Fire ratings of walls and smoke zones s) Fire stopping details both typical and special t) Elevator details, finishes and lighting u) Plans and details of areas to be remodeled in the existing

building v) Access to roofs and associated details w) Expansion joint details and locations x) Miscellaneous supports systems for ceiling mounted

equipment y) Detailed large scale plans with elevations and construction

details of all public spaces such as waiting rooms and lobbies with special interior design detail is used.

z) Show fire extinguisher locations. Do a final verification that the travel distances are compliant with code.

10. Plumbing Plans

a) Revised and updated one line diagrams of medical gas systems including revised final calculations and cfm requirements shown on riser diagram

b) Riser diagrams of domestic hot and cold water c) Riser diagrams of waste and vent systems with fixture

counts d) Floor plans with all plumbing systems laid out e) Completed roof and under ground drainage systems f) All fixtures and their locations g) Domestic hot water heating equipment h) Piping schematic diagrams and equipment connection

details



i) Storm and Sanitary Sump Pump Details j) Medical gas piping floor plans k) Location of medical gas alarms and zone valves. l) Location of roof overflow outlets at grade.

11. HVAC Plans

a) Mechanical Room Plans with all equipment, ductwork and piping shown. Plans shall include all permanent scaffolding/platforms that may be required to meet OSHA & MiOSHA safety maintenance accessibility for equipment mounted in inaccessible locations. Plans shall demonstrate those service isles are maintained for service and equipment replacement. In this regard particular attention shall be given to smoke detectors. Access to mechanical rooms for equipment replacement through exterior louvers shall be maintained.

b) Provide detailed coordinated sections through mechanical rooms showing equipment, ductwork, HVAC piping, plumbing piping and all conduit to demonstrate a fully coordinated design.

c) Updated and revised HVAC load calculations including finalized dew point calculations

d) Air handling unit duct riser diagrams with all required dampers and cfm requirements (both present and future cfm are to be shown) at each floor branch to main takeoff. Riser diagrams shall indicate AHU designation.

e) Floor plans with duct layouts and terminal devices. Indicate on plans with screen symbolism areas beneath ductwork that are to be kept free of all other utilities in order to maintain access to fire/smoke dampers, valves, etc.

f) HVAC piping plans with all piping clearly labeled, all pipe sizes shown and with flow direction indicated. Plan shall clearly indicate the location of all service balancing and isolation valves. Show isolation/balancing valves at all riser to floor branch mains indicating floor design gpm requirements. Show isolation valve at all branch main takeoffs. Standard details for reheat coils will be acceptable.

g) Include HVAC piping riser diagrams chilled water, heating hot water, steam and condensate indicating gpm flow and/or lbs. per hour of steam requirements at each floor branch takeoff.

h) Perimeter heating plans with piping for radiant ceiling panels and finned tube radiation. Indicate all required valves on plan.



i) Updated statement of design intent j) Large scale plans of mechanical shafts at each floor showing

all ductwork and piping k) Detailed temperature control diagrams with sequence of

operation and detailed points listing all shown on the drawings. Sequences of operation in specifications will not be acceptable

l) Smoke purge control strategy m) Mechanical piping details and diagrams of all equipment n) Duct details o) Fire/smoke/combination damper installation details p) Equipment schedules with clear delineation of present and

future capacity requirements q) Steam PRV location and details r) All equipment details s) Demonstrate with composite sections that HVAC, plumbing,

fire protection and electrical disciplines are coordinated for physical fit, service and accessibility for maintenance.

t) Show location of all duct-balancing dampers on plans. Standard details or notes will not be acceptable

u) Show on plans the location of all required piping balancing valves for all HVAC piping diagrams

v) Converter equipment details and piping schematic diagrams w) Show locations of temperature control panels and VFD’s x) Show all required seismic bracing requirements for

Mechanical Systems. y) Show wall ratings on HVAC plans to verify locations of

smoke and fire dampers 12. Fire Protection

a) Floor plans with layouts of all sprinkler piping and head locations with design hydraulic calculations.

b) Show all pipe hangers and required seismic bracing requirements

c) Show all hydraulic calculation nodes d) Provide details and sequence of operation for pre-action

system e) Include a plan of the Building’s existing fire pump loop and

points of new connection f) Plans shall indicate the type, model number and quantity of

each sprinkler head g) Fire protection drawing shall show all fire rated walls and

smoke partitions



h) All drain down solutions for the system shall show a location to the outside of the building that does not impact pedestrian and vehicular traffic or to a hard piped drain location.

i) See JLL@BHS Standard Section 21 10 00 for additional requirements.

13. Electrical Plans

a) Lighting plan of all floors b) Light level calculations c) Fixture switching/layout d) Electrical equipment plans and details e) All distribution, lighting and receptacle panel locations with

designations as determined by JLL@BHs TIG f) Power and signal floor plans showing locations of receptacle

and data/communications outlets g) Site electrical plans-underground conduit/ducts, lighting,

signs, security, gates and illuminated signs h) Communication riser diagrams i) Normal and Emergency power riser diagrams j) Normal and Emergency power one line diagrams k) Panelboard schedules, including present and future load

capacities l) Fire alarm floor plans showing locations of required devices m) MCC locations and details of equipment served n) Fire alarm riser diagram o) Nurse call system layout p) Paging and music systems q) Control Diagrams r) Show main conduit runs for all conduits 2” and larger s) Emergency generator details t) Lighting fixture schedule u) Show wall ratings on the fire alarm plans for reference. v) Special electrical components and their locations: UPS,

TVSS, harmonic filters, power factor correction capacitors. w) Show users specific UPS, data, communication and

emergency power requirements and the system locations.



1.04 Final Design Documents:

A. At project completion and occupancy, the Architect/Engineer will provide the final design documents (project specifications and drawings) in both electronic (PDF & AutoCAD) and bond paper copy (1 each). These final design documents will include all addendum’s, responses to RFI’s and any bulletins that resulted in a drawing or specification change that occurred from the issue of the construction documents for bids through to the completion and occupancy of the project.

B. At project completion and occupancy, the General Contractor will provide

the as-builts in both electronic (AutoCAD) and bond paper copy (1 each). In addition one copy of all closeout documentation including guarantees, MSDS, permits & Certificates of Occupancy from all Authorities Having Jurisdiction (Building, Bureau of Fire Services, Health Facilities Engineering Section, etc.), testing reports, shop drawings & submittals, O&M, etc. will be provided as applicable to each project.

1.05 Construction Document Information

A. Information 1. Cover Sheet:

a) Building Name / Site Location b) Floor and Tower c) Department or Suite Name d) Project name e) JLL@BHS Project Number f) JLL@BHS Project Manager g) Bureau of Fire Services Project Number h) Health Facilities Engineering Section Project Number i) Certificate of Need Number (C of N No.) if required. j) Site Plan locating project. k) A/E Consultant's Company Name and Address l) Sub-Consultant's Company Names and Addresses m) Construction Management Company Name and Address n) Sheet Index o) Package Name (Program, Schematic, Design Development,

Construction, Addendum, Bulletin, etc.) p) Issue Date



B. Full Floor Locator Plan / Life Safety Floor Plan 1. For Hospital Projects:

a) This can be a combined plan showing the project location and, at the minimum, the floor's smoke barriers and the 2-hour building separations for the floor. Included on this plan, the general department/suite locations should be identified for the related adjacencies for the project.

C. For Non-Hospital Projects:

1. A full Floor Locator Plan can be used as a Key Plan on each sheet of as a Floor Locator Plan on the Cover Sheet. Department / Suite locations are only required if they add clarity to the location of the project.

D. Floor Plans

1. All floor plans, existing/demolition, remodeled, architectural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, interiors, equipment, etc., must have room names and room numbers shown. This can be either the room name and number shown in each room, or the room number in the room with a corresponding room name listing on each sheet.

2. The room numbers will be from Beaumont's established room

numbering system as provided by JLL@BHS' Planning and Technical Information Services. The door and opening numbers will be established from the room numbers so that we can tie them back to our database as used by our Facilities Management groups for reference.

3 All floor and equipment plans shall be 1/4" scale and show column

numbers and column lines for locational reference. 4 Locations of temporary, construction partitions and temporary

system support should be shown on the documents.

E. Ceiling Plans 1. Show all wall rating information, new and existing. JLL@BHS

should provide the required wall rating symbol designations. 2. Show a completely integrated ceiling system. Including all

systems, i.e. lights, sprinklers, speakers, diffuses, grilles returns, exit signs, smoke detectors, etc.



F. Demolition Plans 1. The type of systems and their construction should be identified and

noted on the demolition plans.

G. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All codes, rules, regulations, guidelines, requirements, etc., which

are used or referenced in the preparation of documents, and/or are required to be complied with by the Agencies Having Jurisdiction, shall be listed on or in the project documents. The years and editions of these shall be accurately noted in reference to the time frame of the project.

H. Included in this section will also be the following information:

1. Building Occupancy Classification 2. Building Construction Type 3. Building Elements Lists including the hour ratings and assembly

designation 4. Building Seismic Criteria and Classification 5. Finish Material Ratings

I. Also included within this section, for record and future reference, should

be any granted Federal, State and/or City variances. J. All health care projects that fall under the jurisdiction of The Centers for

Medicare and Medicaid Services (CMS) and/or The Joint Commission shall be designed to the 2000 Edition of the National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code.

K. All health care projects that fall under the jurisdiction of The Joint

Commission Shall be designed to the 2010 Edition of the Facility Guidelines Institute (FGI) Guidelines for the Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System, LLC. DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 01 91 00 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01 91 00 General Commissioning Requirements Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 5

1.01 Description

A. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. This is achieved by beginning in the design phase and documenting design intent and continuing through construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance.

B. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the

traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training.

C. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve

the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:

1) Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors.

2) Verify and document proper performance of equipment and

systems. 3) Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete. 4) Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel have received the

required training.

D. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning system.

E. The JLL@BHS Commissioning Steps process will be used as a guide

for developing a commissioning plan. 1.02 Coordination

A. The Construction Commissioning Team will include Contractors, Subcontractors, and Equipment Manufacturers Representatives along with the System Designer, Engineer of Record, JLL@BHS Resident Engineer, JLL@BHS Facility Operations Staff, JLL@BHS Project Manager, Beaumont Fire Safety, and JLL@BHS Consultants. The entire team will participate in the development of a plan and schedule



for the testing, start-up, and training for all new equipment building systems and infrastructure. This plan will be specific to the project.

B. All requirements for warrantees, testing, start-up, and training will be in

the contract documents. The Commissioning Team in Step 2 of the JLL@BHS Commissioning Steps Process determined these requirements.

C. The general contractor, construction manager or design/builder will

integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All Commissioning Team members will address any scheduling problems and make the necessary notifications in a timely manner to the general contractor, construction manager or design/builder in order to expedite the commissioning.

1.03 Commissioning Process

A. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning team meetings the JLL@BHS Project Manager will distribute to all the team members an updated plan which includes all their input. This will be considered the project’s “final” plan, though it will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses.

B. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical

commissioning tasks as the project proceeds and the general order in which they occur.

1) Commissioning during construction begins with an initial

meeting conducted by the JLL@BHS Project Manager where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members.

2) Additional meetings will be required throughout construction.

See project schedule. 3) Equipment documentation is submitted during normal

submittals, including detailed start-up procedures. 4) The JLL@BHS Commissioning Team works with the contractors

in developing startup plans and startup documentation formats. 5) In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds

from simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with pre-functional checklists being completed before functional testing.



6) The contractors will execute and document the pre-functional

checklists and performs startup and initial checkout. The JLL@BHS Commissioning Team documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans. This may include the JLL@BHS Commissioning Team witnessing start-up of selected equipment.

7) The contractor develops specific equipment and system

functional performance test procedures that are approved by the Commissioning Team.

8) The procedures are executed by the contractor, under the

direction of, and documented by the JLL@BHS Commissioning Team.

9) Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are

corrected at the contractor’s expense and the system re-tested. 10) The JLL@BHS Commissioning Team reviews the O&M

documentation for completeness. 11) Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion. 12) The JLL@BHS Commissioning Team reviews, pre-approves

and coordinates the training provided by the contractor and verifies that it was completed.

13) Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required.

C. The cost of all testing, start-up, and training will be the responsibility of

the contractors. This will include any testing equipment and re-testing necessary. The cost of the manufacturer’s representation for testing and training will the responsibility of the contractor. The number of hours along with the cost will be a separate line item in the bid. The cost of re-testing plus any costs incurred by other contractors for delays caused by the re-testing will be the responsibility of the contractor if the deficiency is theirs. If the contractor is not responsible the re-testing costs shall be negotiated with the JLL@BHS Project Manager.

D. In addition to all required submittal data for approval of the equipment,

O & M Manuals, and warrantee information, the contractor will be required to provide documentation on all testing, start-up, and training activities. This documentation will include but is not limited to:



1) Installation, Start-up, and Check-out materials shipped with the equipment

2) Factory or Field Check-out forms used by factory or field technicians

3) Pre-functional and Functional Test Procedures and Check Lists 4) Start-up and System Operational Procedures and Check Lists 5) Sequences of Operation, Control Drawings, Annotated PLC

Ladder Logic printouts, or other equipment documentation. 6) Training Manuals 7) Re-testing of all deficiencies or non-conformance issues

E. All forms and checklists will be developed by the contractor or subcontractor and will be specific to the equipment on this project. The JLL@BHS Commissioning Team will approve forms and checklists.

F. Contractors will also be required to provide equipment data such as

product numbers, make, model, location, serial numbers, and warranty information that is needed for the JLL@BHS equipment management system and warranty administration. The form used to document this information is included with this specification. This information will need to be provided before testing and training begins.

G. All testing, start-up, and training will be scheduled in the Contractor’s

Master CPM Schedule. Seasonal testing and deferred testing will also become part of this contract. Seasonal tests will be delayed until weather conditions are closest to the system’s design. Deferred tests due to the building structure, required occupancy phasing, or other deficiencies will be completed as soon as possible. Seasonal and deferred testing will follow the same procedures, be witnessed by the same personnel, and require the same documentation. A portion of Construction, Manager, Design/Builder, General or Subcontractor fees can be withheld until all testing is complete.

H. Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by

manual testing or monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities. Simulating conditions may be allowed, though timing the testing to experience actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as close, as is practically possible. The contractor executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to



produce the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test the contractor shall return all affected building equipment and systems to their pre-test condition.

I. The Engineer of Record, JLL@BHS Resident Engineer, and

JLL@BHS Facility Operations Staff will be present at all Functional Tests and Start-up activities. The JLL@BHS Facility Operations Staff will designate the personnel to be present at the training sessions. All pre-functional and pre-start-up activities will be documented by the mechanical / electrical contractor and given to the JLL@BHS Project Manager before arrangements are made for the functional tests and start-up. At least 7 working days notice is needed.

J. The contractor will submit at project closeout with the as-built

drawings, a document verifying the following:

1) Systems were tested and function per design intent 2) Systems were installed per manufacturers recommendations

and to industry accepted minimum standards 3) Systems received adequate operational check-out by installing

contractors 4) Proper performance of equipment and systems was

documented and given to the Owner. 5) O & M Manuals and as-built drawings are complete and

accurate. 6) Training has been provided or funding for training has been

provided for Owner’s operating personnel.

K. The Engineer of Record, JLL@BHS Resident Engineer, and JLL@BHS Facility Management Staff will review and approve this document.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System, LLC. DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 01 91 01 - COMMISSIONING STEPS

01 91 01 Commissioning Steps Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4

1.1 COMMISSIONING STEPS Commissioning at Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System is a joint effort between Real Estate Development & Planning, Operations, and Engineering Support. Its purpose is to ensure that all hospital infrastructure, building systems and equipment are designed, installed, and operated correctly with proper operation and maintenance training, documentation, and quality control. Commissioning is a life cycle activity that starts at the beginning of design and carries on through the life of the project and, ultimately, the equipment. The Commissioning Team Leader is the Project Manager. They are ultimately responsible for completing the commissioning activities during design, construction/installation, and project closeout. They also brings the proper resources to the project at the appropriate time and act as a resource to Operations after the Project is complete. The Core Team Members are the Project Manager, Operations, the Resident Architect, the Resident Mechanical Engineer, the Resident Electrical Engineer, the Construction Manager, and the Technical Information Group. Team members listed below are in addition to the Core Team Members.

Step No. Commissioning Activity Project Phase Additional Team

Members Deliverables/Expectations

1 Develop Project Commissioning Goals and Objectives: Review Project Scope Review Design Intent Review User Expectations Review Maintainer

Expectations

Planning/Programming A/E, CM, Planner, Programmer, Infection Control, Beaumont Safety, Beaumont Fire Safety

1. Project Scope Delivered to Client and Commissioning Team

2. Commissioning Goals & Objective Statement

2 Develop Commissioning Scope Establish levels of Review Determine Agency Reviews &

Submissions Determine Systems Testing

Coordination Requirements Determine Warrantee

Requirements and

Planning/Programming A/E, CM, Beaumont Fire Safety, Infection Control

1. Commissioning Responsibility Matrix 2. Commissioning Scope Statement



Administration Step No. Commissioning Activity Project Phase Additional Team


3 Review Commissioning Scope as Applicable to Standards Determines which AMEP

systems and equipment need to be commissioned

Value Engineering Life Cycle Cost Analysis Lessons Learned Review

Planning/Programming A/E, CM 1. Commissioning Specification 2. Testing and Training Requirements

defined.

4 Incorporate Commissioning Concerns during drawing and specification development Confirm system goals are

being incorporated into drawings and specs

Develop consensus on systems design

Review standards and possible change

Define shop drawing and as-built requirements

Determine required testing Determines levels of testing:

manufacturer, contractor, testing agency

Define testing and forms Determine required submittals Define submittals and forms Determine required training Define training and forms Determine required operations

manuals Determine required

documentation Assign responsibilities

Design A/E, CM 1. Commissioning Check List Completed by Facility Services & Tech Services

2. Responsibility Matrix





5 Develop Commissioning Schedule in conjunction with Construction Schedule Utility tie-ins Rough wall inspections Documentation & Photos Systems and equipment

accessibility meetings Quality control meetings Pre-functional tests Functional Tests Project Close-out AHJ inspections

Pre-Construction A/E, CM, Beaumont Fire Safety, JLL@BHS Safety, Infection Control, Subcontractors

1. Commissioning Schedule developed from Commissioning Check List

2. Construction Schedule that includes time for inspections, testing, training, close-out

3. Facility Services Schedule for Construction Walk-thrus

6 Project Commissioning Close Out Development Edit Project Close-Out Check

List to meet needs of Project Develop pre-functional and

functional test forms specific to project

Develop training forms specific to project

Confirm as-built drawing requirements

Pre-Construction Construction

A/E, CM, Contractors, Vendors

1. Check Lists for inspection and testing 2. Training Schedule 3. As-built Drawing Monitoring

7 MEP System Change Validation Joint consultation and decision

by all team members All changes to Standards

reviewed and approved by Standards Committee

All Changes Documented Bulletins/RFI’s issued and

distributed Record Drawings Received

Construction A/E, CM, Contractors, Beaumont Safety, JLL@BHS Safety, Infection Control

1. Minutes for Team Meetings to resolve issues

2. Dispute Resolution Documented 3. Bulletins Issued and Distributed for all

changes





8 Commissioning Acceptance Start-Up Testing completed and

documented Maintenance training

completed and documented User In-service completed Transfer of Warrantee

Information to Facilities Services

Operations and Maintenance Manuals given to Facilities Services

Pre-Occupancy Beaumont Fire Safety, JLL@BHS Safety, Infection Control

1. Signed Acceptance Documents 2. Warrantee Information Given to FS 3. IEI completed 4. Equipment Tagged 5. O & M Manuals delivered to Tech

Library

9 Post-Occupancy Evaluation Final Payment Sign-off Standards

revisions/modifications Life cycle cost analysis

verification Update “Lessons Learned” List

Post Occupancy Beaumont Fire Safety, JLL@BJS Safety, Infection

1. Written Post-Occupancy Evaluation of Project

2. Updated Lessons Learned List 3. Standards Modification Submittals 4. Life Cycle Cost Analysis Review

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System, LLC. DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 01 91 02 ASSET TAGGING LIST (Equipment Requiring Product Data Information)

01 91 02 Asset Tagging List Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 1

Mechanical

Air Handlers Domestic Water Booster Pump Humidifiers Sump Pump Cabinet Unit Heaters Sterilizers Domestic Water Heaters Condensate Receiver & Pump Medical Vacuum Pumps Unit Heater (Water) Medical Air Compressors Unit Heater (Steam) Refrigeration Machine (Chiller) Steam to water Heat Exchanger Forced Draft Steam Boilers Lab Air Compressor Boiler Feed Pumps Lab Air Desiccant Dryer Condensate Pumps Fan Coil Unit Medical Gas Alarm Panels Duplex Instrument Air Compressor Chilled Water Pumps Instrument Air Dryer Heating Hot Water Pumps Air Conditioning Units Heat Recovery Unit Cooling Tower Back Flow Preventers Tanks (fuel, condensate, water, etc.) Hot Water Recirculating Pump Fuel Oil Pumps Hoods (lab, exhaust, vent, etc.) Dampers (Fire, Smoke, Combination) Fans (Exhaust, Return, Roof

Exhaust, Etc) Variable Frequency Drives

Electrical

Sub Stations Distribution Panels Switchgear Lighting Panels Motor Control Centers Isolation Panels Paralleling Switchgear Receptacle Panels Emergency Generator Transformers Emergency Generator Remote

Radiator Nurse Call Control Cabinets

Meters Closed Circuit TV System Master Clock System Alarm Panels Automatic Transfer Switches Fire Alarm Panels Telemetry Control Panels Power Panels UPS

Architectural

Rated Doors Revolving Door Automatic Door Operators Automatic Sliding Door Platform Lift (Wheelchair) Fire Extinguishers

Conveying Systems

Elevators Pneumatic Tube Blowers Dumbwaiters Pneumatic Tube Diverters Pneumatic Tube Stations Trash/Linen Chutes

This list is not meant to be all-inclusive. All equipment that will need preventative or corrective maintenance should be included.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health SystemDESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS

SECTION 01 91 03 CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT INPUT FORM

PO# (or Letter of Engagement #)** Project #

Information Supplied By:

Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor Contractor

Unit ID #Equip First Line of

DescriptionFacilitech

Rm #Vendor /

Contractor Manufacturer Serial Number Model # CostInstallDate

Warranty Period

Warranty Service Contact Drawing # Submittal

**Where the PO# or EL# are different than the main PO# / EL#, please indicate the different la/karen contractor installed equip input formnumber in the spreadsheet column / row related to that particular piece of equipment.All blank rows will be associated with the number indicated at the top.

01 91 03 Contractor Installed Equipment Input Form 1 Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 1

MechanicalStandard No. Standard Name Current

Revision DatePrevious

Revision DateRevision Summary

Author

21 10 00 Fire Protection Design and Material Standard 10/17/11 11/7/08 Added Item #6 on page 5, Updated Standard No.

J Sardana, J Herschelman

22 00 00 Plumbing 10/17/11 7/13/10 2.05 A.3 Piping Materials, Updated Standard No.

R Friebe, J Herschelman

22 10 00 Plumbing Pumps 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

22 11 23 Packaged Booster Pumping Station 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

22 30 00 Domestic Water Heaters 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 10/17/11 7/29/11 Added 1.02.I. b),J, .L; 1.03.A.4: 1.04.A, E, 1.05.A.2: B.2 ; 1.06. F. d), Updated Standard No.

J Herschelman

22 60 00 Medical Gas System 10/17/11 7/13/10 1.01 E. 3&4 Medical Gas Outlets, Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 00 00 Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 10/17/11 8/9/05 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 00 01 Basic Mechanical Requirements 10/17/11 7/13/10 1.03 E. Press Fit Mechanical Fittings, Updated Standard No.

R Friebe, J Herschelman

23 00 02 Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 05 48 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 05 53 Mechanical Piping Identification 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 01 Controls 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 02 Building System Controls 10/17/11 7/13/10 Acord 1.05 BAS Controls Points List, Updated Standard No.

T. Rowlett, J Herschelman

Construction / Design Standards

1/24/2012 O:\FD_BuildingStds\JLL BHS Standards\Standards Update Tracker New #s 072811.xls

MechanicalStandard No. Standard Name Current

Revision DatePrevious

Revision DateRevision Summary

Author

Construction / Design Standards

23 09 03 Building Management Control System 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 13 Control System 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 13.33 Valves 10/17/11 9/8/05 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 33 Electrics/Electronic Controls 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 09 43 Pneumatic Controls 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 20 00 HVAC Pumps 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 21 13 Hydronic Piping 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 22 13 Steam & Steam Condensate Piping 10/17/11 8/9/05 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 22 16 Steam and Condensate Specialties 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 31 13 Metal Ducts 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 51 00 Breeching, Chimney and Stacks 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 52 00 Boilers 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 52 01 Boiler Accessories 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 53 00 Feedwater Equipment 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 64 00 Water Chillers 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 73 00 Air Handling Units 10/17/11 8/5/08 Made changes to Items I and J, Updated Standard No.

J Sardana, J Herschelman

23 74 00 Rooftop Units 10/17/11 4/4/07 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 81 00 Package Air Conditioning Unit 10/17/11 6/30/04 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

23 84 00 Humidification 10/17/11 9/8/05 Updated Standard No. J Herschelman

1/24/2012 O:\FD_BuildingStds\JLL BHS Standards\Standards Update Tracker New #s 072811.xls


DESIGN / CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES & STANDARDS MECHANICAL


DESIGN / CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES & STANDARDS MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section - Index 21 10 00 - Fire Protection Design & Material Requirements ............................................. 1

22 00 00 - Plumbing .......................................................................................................... 2

22 10 00 - Plumbing Pumps .............................................................................................. 3

22 11 23 - Packaged Booster Pumping Station................................................................. 4

22 30 00 - Domestic Water Heaters .................................................................................. 5

22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................................ 6

22 60 00 - Medical Gas System ........................................................................................ 7

23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning ............................................................ 8

23 00 01 - Basic Mechanical Requirement (Acceptable Manufacturers) ........................... 9

23 00 02 - Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods............................................................ 10

23 05 48 - Mechanical Sound & Vibration Control............................................................. 11

23 05 53 - Mechanical Piping Identification ....................................................................... 12

23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing....................................................................... 13

23 07 00 - Mechanical Insulation....................................................................................... 14

23 09 00 - Instrumentation & Controls............................................................................... 15

23 09 01 - Controls............................................................................................................ 16

23 09 02 - Building System Controls ................................................................................. 17

23 09 03 - Building Management Control System ............................................................. 18

23 09 13 - Control Systems............................................................................................... 19

23 09 13.33 – Valves......................................................................................................... 20

23 09 33 - Electrics / Electronics Controls......................................................................... 21

23 09 43 - Pneumatic Controls.......................................................................................... 22

23 20 00 - HVAC Pumps ................................................................................................... 23

23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping ................................................................................................ 24

23 22 13 - Steam & Condensate Piping ............................................................................ 25

23 22 16 - Steam & Condensate Specialties..................................................................... 26

23 31 13 - Metal Ducts ...................................................................................................... 27

23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories...................................................................................... 28


DESIGN / CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES & STANDARDS MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 23 51 00 - Breeching, Chimneys & Stacks ........................................................................29

23 52 00 - Boilers ..............................................................................................................30

23 52 01 - Boiler Accessories ...........................................................................................31

23 53 00 – Feed Water Equipment....................................................................................32

23 64 00 - Water Chillers...................................................................................................33

23 73 00 - Air Handling Units.............................................................................................34

23 74 00 - Rooftop Units ...................................................................................................35

23 81 00 - Package Air Conditioning Units ........................................................................36

23 84 00 – Humidification ..................................................................................................37

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 21 10 00 – FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN AND MATERIALS STANDARDS

21 10 00 Fire Protection Design & Material Standards Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 8

A. Introduction: The Construction Documents for any Addition or remodeling are to include a completely designed fire sprinkler system. The following is an outline of drawing and material requirements that are to be included in the A/E’s design documents.

B. General: All areas of the Hospital’s additions and associated remodeling of existing spaces are to be furnished with a Class 1, Combined Fire Sprinkler System using quick response sprinkler heads and 2 ½” fire department valves. This system will be fed from the Hospital’s existing fire pump loop main feed located in the lower level of the existing Royal oak Hospital, Powerhouse of Troy Campus and Powerhouse of the Grosse Pointe Campus.

C. Description of Existing Hospital Fire Sprinkler System:

1. Royal Oak:

The fire sprinkler system at Beaumont Hospital (Royal Oak) is a Class 1, Combined System with several 6" standpipes serving 2 ½” Fire Department Valves (FDV) and sprinkler distribution piping. This system is served by two (2) electric motor driven fire pumps, both of which are rated at a static pressure of 178 PSI and a residual pressure of 150 PSI at a flow rate of 1500 GPM. The lead pump for this system is located in the South Tower and the second pump is located in the North Tower of the Hospital. Note that the West Powerhouse (Royal Oak Only) does not have a sprinkler system due to the nature of its occupancy and the large amount of electrical power generating equipment and equipment using 4800v power.

2. Troy:

The fire sprinkler system at Beaumont Hospital (Troy) is a Class 1, Combined System with 4”or 6”standpipes serving 2 ½” fire Department Valves (FDV) and sprinkler distribution piping utilizing quick Response sprinkler heads. This system is served by two fire pumps located in the powerhouse. The lead pump is an older one rated at 80 PSI static pressure and 1500 GPM while the newer pump is rated at 90 PSI and a flow rate of 1500 GPM. The system residual pressure is to be maintained at a minimum of 100 PSI.

3. Grosse Pointe:

The majority of the existing standpipe system was approved for installation in early 1974. The system includes 1 40 HP, 500 GPM at 80 PSI pump, eight (8) separate 4 inch standpipes, and four (4) separate fire department connections. All piping and control valves on the existing standpipe system are 4 inch diameter. The fire department valves are standard 2 ½” hose valves.



Existing archive drawings suggest a stand-alone class I standpipe system. It is also apparent that the stand-alone standpipe system was converted to a combined system at a later date. The hospital and attached office building are fully sprinklered. Quick response sprinklers are installed throughout most of the system. Tests conducted in 2009 revealed that the current standpipe system can not supply the required flow at a minimum pressure for an existing system.

D. Design Requirements:

1. All hospital main fire protection supply piping shall be designed for Ordinary Hazard. All hospital areas, except those listed below, are to be designed to Light Hazard Occupancy with a density of 0.10 GPM/FT2 and a remote area of application of 1500FT2. The following rooms or areas shall be designed to Ordinary Hazard Group 1 with a density of 0.15 GPM/FT2 and a remote area of application of 1500FT2:

a) Mechanical Equipment Rooms b) Janitors Closets c) Electrical Rooms d) Trash Rooms e) Laboratories f) Elevator Equipment Rooms g) Clean Linen and Supply Rooms h) Soiled Rooms i) Housekeeping Rooms j) All Storage Rooms k) Film File Rooms

Those areas that house electronic equipment such as computer rooms, communication/telephone switch rooms are to be furnished with wet fire sprinkler systems. The fire alarm system in these areas shall utilize a Vesda monitoring/alarm system that will provide a signal to the Simplex Fire Alarm system. In sensitive areas, such as generator rooms, a Viking Surefire Pre-Action system shall be utilized.

2. The loop mains within each fire zone are to be looped back to its point of origin at the standpipe riser serving that zone.

3. All Fire Department Valves (FDV) are to be 2 ½” in size and be of the pressure restricting type set at 100 PSI. FDV’s threads to be determined by local AHJ.



4. Install sealed heads “UL Listed” in clean room/OR and other special areas as they are accepted by FM Global. All other occupied spaces with ceilings are to have semi-recessed heads. In areas such as mechanical and electrical spaces and storerooms without ceilings use upright sprinkler heads.

5. All new sprinkler heads are to be Quick Response type rated at 155 degrees. In heat sensitive areas, (i.e. autoclave area, steam devices, etc) sprinkler heads shall be rated for the proper operating temperature of the area.

6. All fire sprinkler and standpipe drains shall comply with the following:

a) Inspector Test/Drain piping shall be connected to a standpipe designed to handle a full flow of the 2” drain valve, but not less than 3” dedicated drain line.

b) Auxiliary drains shall be piped to the nearest drain pipe of equal or larger size. Floor drain or floor sink is acceptable in lieu of hard connection to drain pipe.

c) Flushing connections as recommended by FM Global on mains and cross mains are not required.

7. Fire Pump Test Connection shall utilize a venturi system connected to a dedicated sewer drain pipe sized to handle a minimum of 150% rated capacity of the fire pump discharge. Exterior test connections are not required.

8. All fire sprinkler and standpipe installations shall comply with the following regulatory requirements:

a) NFPA-13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems b) NFPA-14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose

Systems c) NFPA-20, Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps d) NFPA-101, Life Safety Code. e) City of Royal Oak, Troy, and Grosse Pointe Fire Department

Requirements. f) Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Fire

Marshal Division UL, all fire systems components are to be Underwriters Laboratories tested and labeled.

g) FM Global data sheet 2-0 Installation Guidelines for Automatic Sprinklers.



E. Material Requirements, Fire Sprinkler System:

1. All materials, fittings, valves and devices shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13 & NFPA 14 and shall be listed for use in fire sprinkler systems. All pipe, fittings and valves are to be of DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE ONLY. Sprinkler piping 2" and smaller is to be joined by threaded fittings. Piping 2 ½” and larger is to be joined by roll grooved fittings.

2. All exposed sprinkler piping shall be painted red.

F. Pipe Materials:

1. All piping 2" and smaller is to be schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A-53 or A-135 with threaded joints and fittings.

2. All piping 2 ½” to 6" in size is to be schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A-135 with roll grooved joints and fittings.

3. All piping 8" and larger is to be schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A-135 with roll grooved joints and fittings.

G. Fittings: 1. Threaded fittings 2" and smaller: Standard pattern cast iron threaded

fittings, Class 125, ANSI Standard B16.4. Threads shall conform to ANSI Standard B1.20.1. Standard pattern malleable iron threaded fittings, Class 150, ANSI Standard B16.3. Threads shall conform to ANSI Standard B1.20.1.

2. Rolled Grooved Fittings and Couplings 2 ½” and larger: Grooved Fittings shall be as manufactured by the Victaulic Company Of America, UL Listed for use in fire sprinkler systems, conform to ASTM Standard A-536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron or ASTM Standard A-47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, or ASTM Standard A-53, Types F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings. Fittings are to be manufactured with shoulders or grooved ends that will accept mechanical grooved coupling. Bolt on Mechanical Tees for use with hole cut pipe are not acceptable. However, these types of fittings may be approved on a case by case basis, if necessary, due to existing field conditions that would require the dismantling of a section of existing sprinkler piping. Where approved bolt on mechanical tees shall be Victaulic Style 921. Bolt on mechanical tees will not be approved due to shop fabrication errors on new piping.

3. Reducing fittings shall be Victaulic Style 50 concentric reducer or Victaulic Style 51 eccentric reducer. Style 750 or similar Victaulic reducing couplings are not acceptable.



4. Rigid Mechanical Couplings are to be Victaulic Firelock Style 005, rated at 350 PSI, UL Listed for use in fire sprinkler systems and be designed for use with rolled grooved piping. Gaskets and seals shall be of the type for the rated service and UL Listed for wet pipe fire sprinkler system use. In dry pipe systems use gaskets and seals listed for dry pipe service.

5. Flexible Mechanical Couplings are to be Victaulic Style 75, rated at 500 PSI for pipes up to 4" in size and 450 PSI for pipe sizes 5" through 8", UL Listed for use in fire sprinkler systems and be designed for use with rolled grooved piping. Gaskets and seals shall be of the type for the rated service and UL Listed for wet pipe fire sprinkler system use. In dry pipe systems use gaskets and seals listed for dry pipe service.

6. Steel Fittings shall comply with ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.

H. Flanges: 1. Cast Bronze Flanges shall comply with ANSI B16.24, Class 150, with

raised ground face and bolt spot faced. 2. Cast iron threaded flanges shall be Class 125 and comply with ANSI

Standard B165.1 with raised ground face and bolt holes spot faced.

I. Valves: 1. Fire Department Valves shall be Croker Figure 5055, 2 ½” pressure

restricting type, rated at 300 PSI and UL Listed. Thread shall conform to the Local Fire Department Standards.

2. System Drain Valves shall be NIBCO, Class 125, threaded bronze globe valve. All system drain valves are to be no less than 2" in size.

3. Inspectors Test and Drain Valves shall be as manufactured by AGF Manufacturing Co., Inc., 2" size, UL Listed/FM Approved, rated at 300 PSI. Valve to include single locking handle, pressure gauge tapping, locking handle, sight glass, and orifice sized to meet project requirements.

4. Monitored Butterfly Valves (for use in piping 2" or less only) shall be Milwaukee Valve Company, bronze body, 175 PSI rated, threaded butterfly valve, UL Listed/FM Approved for use in fire sprinkler systems, and furnished complete with factory mounted integral monitor switch.

5. Control Valves 2 ½” and larger are to be OS&Y flanged end, iron body gate valves, with replaceable bronze wedge face rings, rated at 175 PSI, UL Listed/FM Approved, rising stem as manufacture by; Kennedy or Nibco.

6. Check Valve – One per sprinkler zone or as required in order to minimize draining of the system (i.e. at the base of each riser).



J. Alarm Devices: 1. Zone check water flow test pump assemblies, manufactured by Tyco Fire

and Building Products, shall be utilized at each sprinkler zone. 2. OS&Y Supervisory Switches to be Potter Electric Signal and Mfg. LTD

with one set of SPDT contacts to signal when control valves are in other than open position. Unit to be UL Listed/FM Approved and of tamper-proof design.

K. Gauges: 1. Shall be installed at the top of the riser within 6 feet of the finished floor. 2. New gauges are to have a manufacture date of the current year of final

acceptance of the system.

L. Sprinkler Heads: 1. All new sprinkler heads are to be UL Listed/FM Approved and be of the

Quick Response type rated at 155 degrees, except where ceiling temperature routinely reaches 100 degrees use appropriate heads. All heads are to have ½” orifice size.

2. Sprinkler Heads shall be classified as follows: a. Material:

1. White Finish in public spaces such as lobbies, corridors, etc. 2. Chrome Plated Finish in staff areas such as offices. 3. Bronze Finish in areas without ceilings. 4. Coated Finish in areas subject to corrosion.

b. Styles: 1. Upright 2. Semi-recessed 3. Sidewall 4. Recessed 5. Sealed – Clean areas such as OR’s, Pharmacy Clean

Rooms, Procedure Rooms, etc. 6. Concealed are not permitted unless approved by FM Global

and the Fire Protection Work Group. 3. Acceptable Manufactures are Viking and Reliable.

M. Fire Department Valve and Extinguisher Cabinet:

1. Cabinet shall be manufactured by Larson’s Manufacturing Company designed for flush mounting in wall to house 2 ½” fire department valve and fire extinguisher. Unit to include flat trim and welded mitered corners, interior extinguisher shelf, full glass door and interior baked enamel white finish applied to concealed surfaces and. Exposed surfaces and trim flange are to be stainless steel. Combined unit to have FDV oriented at top with fire extinguisher below it within the code requirement height.



N. Fire Department Valve Cabinet: 1. Cabinet shall be manufactured by Larson’s Manufacturing Company

designed for flush mounting in wall to house 2 ½” fire department valve. Unit to include flat trim and welded mitered corners, full glass door and baked enamel white finish applied to concealed and exposed surfaces.

O. Hangers and Supports: 1. Hangers, anchoring, supports and bracing requirements shall comply with

the requirements of NFPA 13 & NFPA 14. Where piping is joined using rolled grooved joints follow the manufactures instruction for spacing of hangers for fire sprinkler systems. All hangers, anchors, and support devices shall be UL Listed/FM Approved for use in fire sprinkler systems.

2. Install surge suppressors on sprinkler arm-overs or return bends where system pressures exceed 100 PSI.

3. The use of “C” clamps will not be acceptable. 4. All sprinkler piping shall be independently supported.

P. Installation: 1. Install all piping parallel to the building grid lines and locate sprinkler

heads in the center of all ceiling lay in tiles in a straight line methodology. Off center heads are to be approved by the Beaumont Services Company Standards Committee.

2. FDV. Furnish and install new 2 ½” FDV’s as required by NFPA 13 & NFPA 14 as required to meet hose stream and distance/spacing requirements as listed in these codes. Review the location of these valves with the local authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Provide supervised sprinkler control valves at all connections to risers and within 5 feet above finished floor.

4. Where sprinkler piping penetrates rated walls or floors, comply with fire stopping products approved by BSC.

5. Provide valve tags for all valves with Hospital numbering system and approved information.

6. Perform all systems tests as required by NFPA13, NFPA14 and as required by the local authorities having jurisdiction.

7. Provide test and main drain valves at all connections to risers and within 5 feet above finished floor.

Q. Pre-Action sprinkler system: 1. All system components are to be furnished in a factory assembled cabinet

ready for final connections in the field. Acceptable system is Viking Sure-Fire Single Interlock. House Air is to be utilized if available.

2. In order to facilitate system testing, a control valve shall be installed between the pre-action valve and the discharge piping.



R. Fire Sprinkler Drawing Submittal Requirements: 1. Hydraulic calculations are to be submitted for approval on all projects and

shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 13. Hydraulic reference nodes in the calculations are to be clearly indicated on the sprinkler shop drawings. Each submittal is to include a detailed drawing of the existing standpipe fire supply loop in the lower level of the hospital and where points of new connections are to occur. The fire loop drawing is to clearly indicate all piping, piping sizes, fittings, equivalent lengths of pipe and fittings and all fire pumps. The latest fire pump test data shall be included with the submittal and use in the calculations.

2. Fire Sprinkler Shop Drawings/Work Plans are to be submitted with the hydraulic calculations on all projects and shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and as follows:

3. All drawings and plans are to comply with the current Beaumont Services Company’s Technical Information Group Guidelines.

4. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate all fire rated and smoke barrier walls. 5. Show all room names and Facilitech Room Numbers on plans. Stairwells

shall also include the Hospitals Letter Designation, A, B, C, etc. 6. Piping layouts shall clearly indicate; pipe lengths, pipe sizes, and where

rigid and flexible couplings are to be installed. General notes for the location of couplings are not acceptable.

7. Indicate on plans the type and location of pipe hangers. Where sprinkler system pressures will exceed 100-PSI arm-overs and return bends are to be provided with surge suppressor type hangers to prevent upward movement of sprinkler heads during discharge per NFPA 13.

8. Shop drawings shall indicate the manufacturer, type model number and quantity of each sprinkler head that is to be installed.

9. In accordance with NFPA 13, the shop drawings shall indicate where pipe sections will be shop-fabricated with welded tees on all sprinkler mains.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES

SECTION 22 00 00 – PLUMBING

22 00 00 – Plumbing Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 3

PART 1: GENERAL

A. Do not design, install, or through demolition, create any dead ends in a plumbing system.

B. Valved plumbing service branches shall be designed and installed to be

located on the same floor as the fixtures that they serve. C. Hot and cold domestic water lines to missing valves with valved outlets

shall be equipped with check valves before the missing valve. Integral checks in the mixing valve cannot be substituted for these check valves.

D. No sanitary “tees,” double sanitary “tees” or double “wyes” shall be

installed in the sanitary piping system. Exceptions can be determined on a case-by-case basis.

E. Cleanouts shall not be left in ceiling spaces, but extended through the

deck above to a location that is assessable for rodding. F. Required backflow preventers shall be installed in an accessible location

for testing and repair. G. All piping systems shall be labeled to indicate the type of service with

direction of flow arrows. H. Lavatory supplies to sinks shall be chrome plated copper supply tubes.

1.01 STORM SEWER

A. No sewage of waste shall be discharge to storm sewer. B. Acceptable discharge to the storm sewer includes storm water,

groundwater, roof runoff, or uncontaminated cooling water. 1.02 SANITARY SEWER

A. Design and construction of project shall be in accordance with specifications of the municipality having jurisdiction the city of Royal Oak and Troy.

B. Sanitary tees are not acceptable on vertical stacks connecting to

horizontal drain line. Use only single 45 degree wyes when connecting horizontal drain line to a vertical stack. (Required per Beaumont Plumbing Dept. and Approved by the City of Royal Oak “To be approved by the City of Troy” ) Tees may be used on vent piping.

C. No storm water, ground water, roof runoff, subsurface drainage or

uncontaminated cooling water, shall be discharged to the sanitary sewers.




D. At the completion of all new buried piping the contractor shall provide a

video of the interior and exterior of all the new piping to verify integrity of joints.

1.03 ACCIDENTAL DISCHARGE PREVENTION

A. Systems shall be designed so as to prevent accidental discharge of prohibited of deleterious substance to sanitary or storm sewer. Where appropriate, curbs around sumps of floor drains shall be installed. Curbs shall be provided in all emergency generator oil storage rooms.

1.04 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains are required in mechanical equipment rooms, kitchen and

dishwashing areas, garages elevators pits, and public toilet rooms and similar areas.

B. Floor drains shall be connected to the sanitary sewers. C. No floor drain shall be tied to storm sewer system.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER METER

A. Water meter are required on building entrance service. Meter to be Badger disc meter through 1 ½” and Badger Recordall Compound meter 2” and above. Meter shall read in cubic feet. Meter to be complete with plate strainer, valve bypass and pressure gauge on bypass.

B. The water supply to a building must include two reduced pressure zone

backflow preventors, watt’s 909, with strainers, in parallel with ball shut-off valves. Install pressure gauge on both side of RPZ. All RPZ relief drains shall be piped with full sized drain line to the nearest sanitary drain. Sanitary drain shall be capable of handling full discharge from the RPZ.

2.03 HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS

A. Plumbing design shall minimize stored hot water, emphasizing Patterson-Kellem instantaneous Water Heaters or approved equal.

B. All domestic water storage will be 140 degrees Fahrenheit or above, and

mixed for distribution.




2.04 EMERGENCY SHOWER

A. Water service to emergency showers and eyewashes shall have valve with handle near the fixture to provide shutoff capability to service the fixture.

2.05 PIPING MATERIAL

A. Above ground domestic water:

1. Copper tube type L up to 6” wrought copper. 2. Piping lager than 6”: - material will be determined on project basis.

3. Water supply and distribution joints see Section 15050, 1.03 PIPE

JOINING MATERIALS.

B. Aboveground Drainage and Vent:

1. Hubless, cast iron standard soil pipe. 2. For waste and vent from fixture DWV copper.

C. Underground Building Drain

1. Piping thru 8”- Cast iron standard steel pipe SCH 40 PVC and Duriron is acceptable underground piping.

D. Alternate Schedule 40 PVC, Duriron and Polypropelene are acceptable for

corrosive or acid waste.

1. ASTM #A74

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 22 10 00- PLUMBING PUMPS

22 10 00 Plumbing Pumps Issue 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Inline Circulators:

a) "Series 1000", Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b) "Series 60", Bell & Gossett, ITT. c) "1600 Series", Taco, Inc.

2. Storm Sump Pumps: a) Gorman Rupp.

3. Sanitary Sump Pumps: a) Gorman Rupp.

1.02 PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Pumps and Circulators: Factory assembled and factory tested. B. Preparation for Shipping: After assembly and testing, clean flanges and

exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with an anti-corrosion compound. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

C. Motors: Conform to NEMA standards; single, multiple, or variable speed with

type of enclosure and electrical characteristics as indicated; have built-in thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Select motors that are non-overloading within the full range of the pump performance curve.

D. Apply factory finish paint to assembled, tested units prior to shipping.

1.03 INLINE CIRCULATORS

A. General Description: Circulators shall be horizontal inline, centrifugal,

flexible coupled, single-stage, all-bronze, radially split case design, with mechanical seals, and rated for 125 psig working pressure and 225 deg. F continuous water temperature.

B. Casings: Bronze, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections

smaller than 2-1/2 inches, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.

C. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single

suction, fabricated from Rolled Temper brass conforming to ASTM B 36, and keyed to shaft.

D. Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper

sleeve. E. Mechanical Seals: Carbon steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic

seat, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. F. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust bearings.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 22 10 00- PLUMBING PUMPS

22 10 00 Plumbing Pumps Issue 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

G. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated sleeve bearings. H. Shaft Couplings: Flexible; capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment. I. Motors: Resiliently mounted to the pump casing.

1.04 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

A. General Description: Pumps shall be simplex, vertical, centrifugal, direct connected, end suction, single stage, bronze fitted, complete with integral inlet strainer, operating controls, and sump cover.

B. Casing: Cast iron with integral cast-iron inlet strainer and legs to elevate the

pump to permit flow into the impeller. Discharge shall be arranged for vertical discharge. Companion flanges (if applicable) shall be suitable for plain-end pipe connection.

C. impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, open or semi-open, overhung,

single suction, fabricated from cast bronze conforming to ASTM B 584, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking cap screw.

D. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-

lubricated ball bearings. E. Seals: Double mechanical seals. F. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor start, with built-in overload protection,

with 20-foot, 3-conductor, waterproof cable and grounding plug. G. Basin: Fiber glass with inlet, discharge and controls connections. H. Cover: 40" diameter 1/4" plate steel, bolted to basin, with 18" x 28" hinged

access door for pump access. I. Controls: NEMA 6, float switch complete with float, float rod, and rod

buttons. Control system for sump pump shall be designed and operated so that upon loss of power, control circuit shall be automatically reset upon power restoration allowing pump to operate without the need for manual reset. If electronic controls are used, the ride through for starting shall be for a minimum of 90 minutes. Control panel shall be NEMA 4X, non-metallic. Control panel shall have provision for general alarm output to BAS.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 22 11 23- PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPING STATION

22 11 23 Packaged Booster Pumping Station Issue 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 PRODUCTS 1.01 CONSTANT SPEED DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Manufacturer/Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Bell & Gossett 2. Synchroflo, Inc. 3. Detroit Pump/Cornell.

B. General: Provide equipment, components and assemblies necessary to

implement a completely integrated, automatic, self regulating, constant discharge pressure, triplex staged pump system. 1. The system shall consist of all pumps, motors, controls, appurtenant

field devices and miscellaneous equipment required for a complete system. All system components shall be provided by a single supplier who shall assume unit responsibility for their coordination, compatibility, performance, and proper operation.

2. The packaged pump system shall be for the domestic water service.

The pump system shall have all piping, valves, pumps, motors, pump controls, control panel and wiring assembled on a heavy steel base with flanged water connections and a single electrical connection for the power wiring. The system flow shall be designed for the scheduled capacities.

3. The control center shall be U.L. listed. The control center shall also

include an incoming line section with a main disconnect switch with door interlocking mechanism. The control center shall include a bottom cable chase.

C. Construction: The pump shall be of the vertical multi-stage design with the

motor mounted directly to the top of the pump. D. The pump suction/discharge chamber, motor stool and pump shaft coupling

shall be constructed of cast iron. The impellers, pump shaft, diffuser chambers, outer discharge sleeve and impeller seal rings or seal ring retainers shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impellers shall be secured directly to the pump shaft by means of a stainless steel tapered split cone and locking nut, or by a splined, shaft arrangement. Intermediate and lower shaft bearings shall be bronze or tungsten carbide and ceramic. Pumps shall be equipped with a high temperature mechanical seal assembly with tungsten carbide seal faces mounted in stainless steel seal components.

1. Each pump shall be provided with suction and discharge lug-type

butterfly isolation valves. Valves shall be gear operated. All piping shall be independently supported. All control sensing lines and gauges shall be piped with shutoff valves.

2. Each pump discharge shall be provided with a combination pressure

regulating and non-slam check valve. Valve body shall be cast iron with epoxy coated cover, and brass or epoxy coated disc guide, disc retainer and diaphragm washer.



3. All components shall be assembled on a structural steel base suitable

for mounting on vibration isolators. 4. Maximum liquid velocity in system or branch piping shall be 8 feet per

second. 5. The system shall be hydrostatically tested as a completely assembled

package at 150 PSIG working pressure and flow tested on a certified NBS traceable test stand, then painted after testing with an electrostatic applied epoxy-enamel. A five-point flow test technique shall be utilized and may be witnessed by the Owner's Project Representative('s) at the Owner's Project Representative('s) option. All test results shall be included in the System Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Motors: Motors shall be 1750 RPM. Pumps shall not overload the motor at

any point on the pump curve. F. Controls:

1. General: Controls shall be provided to automatically sequence the

pumps according to system demand, and provide sufficient system status indication to allow the operator to intelligently and efficiently monitor and control the overall system performance. The control center shall serve as the termination and emanation point for all field devices and associated equipment as detailed. It shall contain all pump staging circuits, pressure process control systems and flow instrumentation.

2. Local/Remote Setpoint: For interface with external automation

equipment, transfer of the control setpoint between a remote station and the internally stored value shall be switch selective.

3. Controller: All sequence steps shall be equipped with adjustable time

delays to prevent short cycling and nuisance trips. Alarm conditions shall be provided with preset time delay, indication and a common audible alarm circuit with silence button. Alarm signal shall be capable of annunciating to BAS.

a) Each pump operated by this panel shall be provided with

manual-off-automatic selector switches. Each pump shall be provided with running and failure logic circuits with visual indication for each condition. "Failure" alarm circuits shall be active in manual or automatic modes. Manual and automatic alternation shall be provided for all equally sized and similarly driven units. In automatic, alternation shall be based on 24 hours elapsed time, duty cycle or minimum run time selectable in the field. The loads shall be overlapped during the alternation cycle.

b) Any equipment with a failure alarm shall be locked out of its

staging strategy until manually reset by the operator. The first available lag load shall be substituted for the failed unit.



c) Pump staging logic shall direct the jockey pump to operate on pressure drop. Lag pump(s) shall be sequentially staged on any time a deviation between a measured pressure and operator selected setpoint persists beyond an adjustable time delay. Pump(s) shall be subtracted based on system flow.

d) Each pump shall have a no-flow thermal safety switch with a

system solenoid valve opening to drain. The system shall incorporate a low suction pressure shutdown and high system pressure shutdown with automatic reset.

4. Process Alarms: Two individual alarms shall be provided. One shall

be a deviation alarm; the other shall be a deviation band alarm. Each alarm shall have selective setpoints which may be assigned by the operator. An SPDT Form C contact rated at 1A/120VAC, 50/60 Hertz shall be assigned to each alarm for remote monitoring.

5. Equipment Alarms: All equipment under the operation of the process

controller shall alarm 'failure to run' and 'failure to stop' by flashing the Run light.

G. Instrumentation

1. Pressure Transmitter: Pressure transmitter shall be installed on

factory discharge header and factory wired. They shall be complete, self-contained units designed for two-wire, DC current transmission. Connection to the control panel shall be by a 22 gauge, twisted pair cable. Power for the transmitters shall be 24 VDC and shall be located at the control center.

a) Span and Zero: Continuously adjustable externally. b) Static Pressure and Over Pressure Limits: 0.5 PSIA-2000

PSIG, either side operating. c) Accuracy: 10.25 calibrated span. d) Stability: 10.25 of upper range limit for six months.

2. Flow Measurement System: System flow shall be measured by an

inferential instrumentation system. The system shall consist of an insertion style flow rate transducer and power source/signal conditioning package. System accuracy shall be 13% of the measured flow rate between liquid velocities of 1.0 to 30 feet per second including the combined effects of linearity and hysteresis. Repeatability within the performance range shall be 11.0%. System shall have an achievable accuracy of 11%. All specifications shall be supported by test results from an independent laboratory with NBS traceability.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 22 30 00- DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

22 30 00 Domestic Water Heaters Issue 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 3

PART1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 SEMI-INSTANTANEOUS STEAM DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Part 1 General:

A. Hot water heaters shall be of the vertical shell and tube design, with water in the shell and steam in the coils. Capacity shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Heater: The heaters shall have free floating helical coils designed to

facilitate descaling by normal operation temperature and pressure changes or thermal shock.

C. Coils: Coils shall be secured to supply and return manifolds by union

connections. D. Coils shall be of #18 BWG corrosion-resistant arsenical copper. E. Pneumatic: Pneumatic temperature control valve shall be pilot operated with

diaphragm operated statically and dynamically balanced, full ported, single seated, normally closed main valve, with stainless steel trim, cast iron body with screwed ends, and teflon main valve seat.

F. Controls: An internal "Compensator" shall continually sample both incoming

and heater water temperatures, and impulse the temperature control valve so as to provide accurately controlled outlet temperatures, regardless of variations in water flow rate or incoming water temperatures.

G. Shell: Shells shall be fabricated of flange quality steel and shall be copper

lined. H. Construction shall be in accordance with ASME standards for unfired

pressure vessels for 150 psi working pressure with teflon coated bolted heads. Heater shall be provided with ASME stamp.

I. Heaters shall be mounted on 3 pipe legs with floor flanges or brackets for

wall mounting. J. Unit shall be insulated in conformance with latest ASHRAE 90-80 standards

and shall be complete with heavy gauge steel shroud. K. Accessory package shall include thermometers, compound gauge, AGA

rated temperature and pressure relief valve and Union orifice. L. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide semi-

instantaneous steam domestic water heaters of one of the following: 1. Aerco Corp. 2. Patterson Kelly



10.2 INSTANTANEOUS STEAM DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

A. General: Domestic water heater shall be instantaneous type, steam water heater consisting of an integrally piped heater control package capable of supplying hot water heated to 100 degrees F. over inlet cold water temperature without the use of thermostatically control devices, storage tanks or aspirating devices. Control system shall be feed forward for quick accurate response to load change.

B. Heaters: Heaters shall be designed for steam conditions and flow rates as

indicated on equipment drawings. The unit shall be capable of maintaining a set temperature within plus/minus 4 degrees over full flow range of 1 to 100% of rated capacity. Heater shall be complete and prepiped with blending valve and heat exchanger and to be provided with all steam traps, strainers, pressure gages and thermometers. Heater shall be of cast steel shell construction rated for 150 psi working pressure with a copper helical coil heat exchanger in the shell.

C. Blending Valve: Blending valve shall be of cast bronze with bronze-

aluminum main valve. Blending valve shall also have temperature adjusting knob for ease of temperature adjustment setting.

D. Couplings: Manifold couplings of heater shall be of the grooved type and

prepiped to the blending valve. E. Recirculation: The unit shall be provided with a pre-piped, pre-engineered

recirculation package including all necessary components, i.e., check valves, globe stop valves, three-way thermocapsules, fittings and pumps.

F. The recirculation pump shall be capable of recirculating 15 to 25% of the total

capacity of the heater through the recirculation package. G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

instantaneous steam domestic water heaters of one of the following: 1. Graham Micro-Mix II 2. Leslie Constantemp.

1.03 GAS FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

A. Unit shall be of the high efficiency type complying with ASME pressure vessel codes and have a working-pressure rating of 160-psig. Unit shall have a sealed combustion chamber configuration and components complying with the latest & appropriate requirements of ANSI Z21.13 and UL 795.

B. Acceptable manufactures, subject to complying with the above requirements,

products shall be one of the following: 1. Aerco, International Inc. 2. Lochinvar 3. A.O. Smith



1.04 HOT WATER DISPENSERS

A. General: Provide hot water dispensers as indicated, consisting of insulated tank with drain plug, chrome-plated faucet, instant self-closing valve, and adjustable thermostat.

B. Capacity: 1/2 gal., 100 cups of water per hour at 190 deg. F. C. Thermostat: Snap action, adjustable from 140 deg. F. to 200 deg. F., factory

preset at 190 deg. F. D. Electrical: 1.300 watts, 115-volts, UL listed. Provide 3-wire cord with NEMA

3-prong grounding plug. E. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hot water

dispensers of one of the following: 1. In-Sink-Erator Div. 2. Emerson Electric Co.


22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures Issue 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 14

1.01 Lavatories:

A. Lavatory (LAV-1):

1. Countertop style, 20X17: oval vitreous china, self-rimming, fitting ledge, and front overflow. Grid drain with C.P. tailpiece and drilled to receive specified faucet. Provide type L1-L2 faucet, CP 1-1/4” trap, supplies and stops as specified hereinafter.

Acceptable manufacturers: a) American Standard – Aqualyn 0476.028 b) Kohler – Pennington K – 2195.

B. Lavatory (LAV-2):

1. Wall hung 20"x18" vitreous china. Front overflow, contoured back and side splash shield, fabricated for concealed arm support, grid drain with C.P tailpiece and back deck drilled to receive specified faucet. Provide Type L1-L2 faucet, remote tempered water mixing valve, install thermostatic mixing valve, Lawler Model 7000, CP 1-1/4 trap, supplies, stops and companion chair carrier as specified hereinafter. Provide and install truebro insulation shield on drain and supplies. Comply with Michigan Department of Labor Barrier Free rules (ADA Requirements). Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American Standard – Lucerne 0355.012

C. Lavatory (LAV-3):

1. Under counter style, 19-1/4”X17” vitreous china, with unglazed rim, rear overflow, supplies with mounting kit. Provide type L3 faucet, remote tempered mixing valve CP 1-1/4” trap, supplies, stops as specified hereinafter. Comply with Michigan Department of Labor Barrier Free Rules

Acceptable Manufactures: a) American Standard Ovalyn II 0496.011. b) Kohler




D. Lavatory (LAV-4): Patient room only.

1. Solid surface integral bowl and countertop provided by architectural trades. Provide Type (L-1) Faucet, trap, tailpiece grid drain water supplies.

Acceptable Manufactures: a) Kohler. b) American standard.

E. For Barrier Free LAV, Provide remote, mixing value and comply with

Michigan Department of Labor.

1. Barrier Free Rules Mixing Valve. Acceptable Manufactures: a) Watts

1.02 Stainless Steel Sinks

A. Single Compartment Sink:

1. Single compartment 19”x21” 0verall, 14x18x7-1/2” deep basin compartment, self-rimming with ledge center punched to receive specified faucet.

2. Center punch, bowl for stainless steel crumb cup strainer with

removable basket having rubber seat stopper, and 1-1/2” O.D CP brass tailpiece. Fabricated sink from 18ga. Type stainless steel conforming to ASTMA 167 having working surfaces finished in accordance with ASTMA 480 No. 4 satin finish and sound deadened bowl underside provide faucet, trap, and stops as specified hereinafter. Refer to each project for specific overall / bowl / basin sizes and other requirement.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Just - Stylist SL-1921-A-GR b) Elkay - Lustertone LR-2219




B. Free Standing Double compartment Sink:

1. Stainless steel free standing two compartment 72:x24x36: high overall (2) 14”x20”x7-1/2” deep basin with back ledge center punched to receive specified faucet, each top supported on six (6) tubular legs. Underside of bowl completely sound deadened anti-splash rim around perimeter of drain board. Steel frame around entire front and ends of drain board for fastening to wall. Top shall be of 302, 16 gauge stainless steel with b basin of 302 18-gauge stainless steel. Polish bowl to match countertop. Provide faucet, trap and stops as specified hereinafter. Refer to each project for specific overall / bowl / basin sizes and other requirement.

Acceptable Manufacturers a) Just DL-1933-A-GR b) Elkay

C. Surface Mount Double Compartment Sink:

1. Double compartment 19”x32 overall, two 14”x14”x7-1/2”deep basin compartment, self-rimming, with back ledge center punched to receive specified faucet. Center punch, bowl for stainless steel crumb cup strainer with removable basket having rubber seat stopper and 1-1/2” OD.CP brass tailpiece. Fabricate sink from 18 gauge type stainless steel conforming to ASTM A-167 having working surface finished in accordance with ASTM A 480 No.4 satin finish and sound deadened bowl underside. Provide faucet, trap and stops as specified hereinafter. Refer to each project for specific overall / bowl / basin sizes and other requirement.

Acceptable Manufacturer: a) Elkay-Lustertone LR-1720 b) Just.

D. Surgical Scrub Sink:

1. Single compartment 32”wide x 27-1/4”deepX38”high automatic surgical scrub sink shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel with No. 4 finish. All corners are to welded ground and polished to match No. 4 finish.

2. Each station shall be equipped with 2-IPS stainless steel drain,

anti-splash gooseneck faucet with removable hose spray, built in flow control. Underside if sink shall be coated with sound deadening material.




3. No.18 gauge stainless steel outer enclosure shall have removable stainless steel panel. Soap bottle shall be located behind the panel for soap dispenser pump.

4. Provide faucet, trap, and stops as specified hereinafter. Refer to

each project for specific overall / bowl / basin sizes and other requirement.

Acceptable Manufacturer:

a) Amp model 1-32A

E. Clinic Sink:

1. Vitreous china, bowl-out flushing action, flushing rim, wall hung, and 1-1/2” top SPUD

2. Provide chair and quite action, flush valve as specified hereinafter. 2. Provide faucet, trap, and stops as specified hereinafter. Refer to

each project for specific overall / bowl / basin sizes and other requirement.

Acceptable Manufacturers: b) Kohler K-12867, c) American Standard 9512-013 d) Supply Fitting: Chicago 814-VB, Crane CH-8542 e) Bedpan Cleaner: Chicago 910-G, Crane CH-8306

F. Disposer:

Acceptable Manufacturer: a) Insinkerator b) Waste King

G. Service Sink:

1. Mechanical Equipment Room (SS-1) 22”x18”x9’ cast iron service ink having acid resisting porcelain enameled inside, roll rim with 9” high back, stainless steel rim guard and concealed hangers. Unit complete with 3” adjustable cast iron trap standard to wall having acid resisting enamel finish inside, painted outside, cleanout plug and strainer. Provide type SS faucet as specified hereinafter.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American Standard-Lakewell 7696.016 b) Kohler- Bannon K-6718




H. Mop sink - Housekeeping Room:

1. Service Sink 24”x24”x12” high inside, drop front, stainless steel

cap, manufactured of tan and white marble chips cast in white Portland cement to produce a comprehensive strength of not less than 3000psi, seven days after casting. Terrazzo surface shall be grounded and polished with all air holes and or pits, grouted and sealed o resist stain and moisture. Stainless steel protective cap to be cast integral on drop front.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Florestone Model 96 Neo Angle Front, terrazzo, mop

receptor.

I. Water Closets Wall Type:

1. Vitreous china, water saver siphon jet action elongated bowl, back outlet, wall hung and 1-1/2” top spud. Provide chair carrier suitable for minimum weight 500 pounds, elongated open front seat and quiet action flush valve as specified hereinafter.

2. Comply with Michigan Department of Labor Barrier Free Rules.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American Standard – Afwall 2477.016 b) Kohler- Kingston - K-4330

J. Water Closets Floor Mounted:

1. Without exception, this style of watercloset shall be used, in all inpatient and required barrier free toilet/bathroom locations.

2. Vitreous china, water saver siphon jet action elongated bowl, and 1-

1/2” top spud. Elongated open front seat and quiet action flush valve as specified hereinafter.

3. Comply with Michigan Department of Labor Barrier Free Rules.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Kohler – Highcrest – K-4302




K. Urinals UR-1:

1. Vitreous china, water saver siphon jet action,3/4” top inlet spud, flushing rim, extended stall side for privacy, 2” NPT female back outlet complete with concealed wall hangers. Provide chair and quite action flush valves specified hereinafter.

2. Comply with Michigan Department of Labor barrier Free Rules.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American Standard-6530.018 b) Kohler K-4970T

L. Hands-Free Urinal Assembly HF-UR-1

1. Vitreous china urinal with quiet, exposed diaphragm type, chrome plated urinal flush-o-meter

Acceptable Manufacturer: a) Sloan WEUS-1000.1403-0.13 SMOOTH

1.03 Safety Equipment

A. Emergency eye wash:

1. Deck mounted unit, polished chrome plate swing away design for mounting on countertop. Consisting of the following

2. Twin chrome plated brass anti-surge heads. Dust cover to protect

the heads and automatically release the water pressure. 3. Stay open polished chrome plated brass ball valve activated by

push flag ½” IPS water supply. a) Universal emergency sign. b) Dual automatic pressure compensating control device for

steady flow.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Haws b) Bradley c) Guardian




4. Eyewash Thermostatic Mixing Valve Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Lawler 911 E/F b) Bradley S19 Series

B. Electric Water Cooler Single Receptor

Acceptable Manufactures a) Elkay – EHF-8 b) Haws _ HCBF7 c) Halsey Taylor

C. Wall Mounted Water Cooler Double receptor

Acceptable Manufacturer a) Haws-HWDFS8-2 b) Elkay – ERHP -2-8 c) Halsey Taylor

1.04 Fittings, Trim, Accessories, Faucets and Mixing Valves

A. Lavatory Faucet (Type L1-L2):

1. Polished chrome plated cast brass deck mounted vandal resistant dual 4” wrist blades, 4” center set with 3/8” OD CP copper inlets, less pop-up drain and Laminar flow outlet.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American Standard 7500.170 b) Chicago 895317 c) T&S Brass B-892

B. Lavatory Faucet (Type L-3):

1. Polished chrome finish, deck mounted, dual handle with wrist blades utility faucet with gooseneck spout. Control mechanism is the rotating ball type with replaceable non-metallic seats operating in stainless steel lined sockets, with laminar flow aerator less pop-up drain.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American standard 6532.170 b) Chicago 786-E3 c) T&S Brass B-867 WH4




C. Sink Faucet (Type A):

1. Polished chrome plated cast brass, 8” centers, wrist control supply fittings with 4” blade handles, swing gooseneck spout, aerator, outlet not less than 5” above deck. Provide trap and stops as specified hereinafter.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Chicago 786-e3 b) T& S Brass B-867 WH4 c) American Standard 6532.170

D. Sink Faucet (Type B):

1. Wall mounted, double pedal valve with1/2 inch I.P.S. inlet and outlets. C.P 9inch high gooseneck spout, vandal proof anti-hose aerator, stainless steel drain fitting with ½” O.D. tailpiece. Provide mounting package.

Acceptable Manufactures: a) Chicago b) T & S c) Kohler

E. Sensor Operated Faucets (SOF)

GENERAL NOTES: A. Due to the potential risk of increased growth of Legionella and other

microbial contaminants in their assemblies, sensor operated faucets shall not be allowed to be installed in any patient care or patient treatment locations.

B. Sensor operated faucets shall require the close proximity of a hot

water main or be provided with the service of a hot water loop.

1. SOF – 1. Public and Private Toilet Rooms, public waiting rooms.

Polished chrome plated solid brass construction. 6V Lithium CRP2 battery (included). Low battery indicator. Cast brass spout with .5 GPM vandal resistant spray outlet. Multiple field adjustable modes and ranges. Dual supply for Hot and cold water services. Concealed internal temperature control mixer. Above deck hermetically sealed electronics module and solenoid with filter screen. Inlet supply check valves. Free Spinning flexible stainless steel supply hoses with filter screen. Mounting hardware included.




Must meet ADA requirements and be tested and certified to industry standards: ASME A112.18.1 and CSA B125.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Chicago Faucets 116.212.21.1

2. SOF – 2. Staff areas including staff toilet rooms, handwash sinks in

non-patient areas, staff lounges, facilities shops.

Polished chrome plated solid brass construction. 6V Lithium CRP2 battery (included). Low battery indicator. 5 3/8” C_C rigid/swing field convertible gooseneck spout with .5 GPM vandal resistant spray outlet. Multiple field adjustable modes and ranges. Dual supply for Hot and cold water service. User adjustable temperature control mixer. Above deck hermetically sealed electronics module and solenoid with filter screen. Inlet supply check valves. Free Spinning flexible stainless steel supply hoses with filter screen. Mounting hardware included. Must meet ADA requirements and be tested and certified to industry standards: ASME A112.18.1 and CSA B125.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a). Chicago Faucets 116.223.21.1

F. Clinical Service Sink Flush valve:

1. Quiet exposed clinical service sink flush valve, chrome plated metal oscillating non-hold open handle, 1-inch I.P.S screw driver stop with protective cap, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker, flush connection with 1” offset and spud coupling 1-1/2” top spud wall spud flange.

Acceptable Manufactures: a) Sloan Royal 117HO

G. Clinical Service Sink Bedpan Cleanser:

1. Assembly shall be provided with hot and cold water service, Assembly shall be built in, wall mounted and complete with high mounted vacuum breaker, valve body , vinyl hose, self-closing lever control spray hook and screwdriver check stop. All exposed metal to be chrome plated.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American Standard 7880. 083 b) Kohler K-13939-T




H. Service Sink or Mop Sink Faucet:

1. Polished chrome brass, vandal resistant, combination service sink fitting with vacuum breaker, ¾” rigid hose thread spout, lever handles, wall brace and flanged female adjustable arms with integral stops.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) American standard – 8344.112 b) Cambridge Brass 28T2383 c) Chicago Faucet - 897-CO

I. Shower Faucet (Type SH-1):

1. Polished chrome brass, shower valve and head with both hand held fixed spray head and diverter, 21/2 gpm flow, with integral check stops.

2. Shall be mounted on a surface mounted glide bar, that cannot be

misconstrued as a grab bar, or on a fully anchored and code compliant grab bar.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Leonard 55-4B, LVC-TB b. Symmons c. Alsons d. Powers E425C-4W

1.05 Flush Valves:

A. Water Closet:

1. Quite action, exposed closet flush valve, chrome plated oscillation non-hold open handle, 1” I.P.S. screw driver operated combination angle check and stop valve with protective cap, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 1 1/2” top spud flanged

Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Sloan –110- YB b) Zurn- Z-6000XL




2. Hands-free. To be used in public and staff locations only.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Sloan b) Zurn

B. Urinals:

1. Quiet action, exposed urinal flush valve, chrome plated, metal oscillating non-hold open handle 3/4” I.P.S. screwdriver operated combination angle check and stop valve with protective cap, adjustable, vacuum breaker, flush connection and spud coupling for ¾” top spud, wall and spud flanges.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Sloan – Royal 180 b) Zurn – Z 600 1XL

2. Hands-free. To be used in public and staff locations only.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Sloan b) Zurn

1.06 Fixture Supports:

A. Wall Type Lavatory Supports:

1. Cast Iron supports, having tubular steel upright with concealed arms and sleeves, mounted on adjustable headers (with escutcheons, for slab type lavatories) and complete with heavy cat iron short feet, alignment trusses, and mounting fasteners. Barrier free installation shall be accommodated with appropriate supports.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Zurn- Series ZR-1231 b) J.R. Smith – Series 700-M31 c) Jonespec- Series 42100 d) Josam- Series 171

B. Wall Type Water Closet Supports:

1. Adjustable, factory painted, cast iron plate, support base, and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket, zinc plated steel fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded wall coupling with neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixtures cap




nuts and fiber fixture washer. Provide an appropriate model to suit deep of shallow rough –in siphon jet or blow water closet single of back to back installations, vertical of horizontal installation able to hold 500pounds and type of sanitary piping system to which it is connected. Provide support with suitable adjustable to mount barrier-free fixtures at any location of a battery of in single installation.

Acceptable Manufacturers a) Zurn-Series ZR-1200 or ZER-1200 b) J.R. Smith – Series – 100,200 and or 400 c) Jonespec- Series 41000 d) Josam – Series 12000 and or 14000

C. Adjustable Wall Type Urinal Supports:

1. Concealed supports for urinal shall have steel top and bottom plates with bolts to support fixture independently from the wall; adjustable sleeve, steel tubular upright and alignment truss, steel plates with adjustable holes, bolts, nuts and chrome plated cap nuts and washers. Top supporting plates shall have cutouts when used with back inlet urinals. Supports shall accept hangers furnished with urinal. Barrier free installation shall be accommodated with appropriate supports.

Acceptable Manufactures: a) Zurn-Series ZR1222 b) J.R. Smith – Series 637 c) Jonespec-Series 42310 d) Josam-Series 17810

D. Wall Type Electric Cooler Supports:

1. Concealed supports for water coolers shall be rigid plate system having rectangular steel upright with adjustable support plate, bolt, nuts complete with heavy cast iron feet and mounting fasters. Support shall accommodate barrier free installation.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Zurn Series ZR-1225 b) J.R. Smith-Series 830 c) Jonespec-Series 17900




E. Water Closet Seat:

1. Standard water closet Seat: elongated, chemical and impact resistant, solid white, plastic, closed back/open front seat with bumpers less cover. Concealed check and stainless steel hinge post.

Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Olsonite-10CC b) Church-295C c) Beneke-533

F. Supplies and Stops for Lavatories and Sinks:

1. Polished chrome plated, loose-keyed angle stop having ½” inlet and 3/8” O.D. chrome plated brass flexible tubing risers ½” chrome plated brass nipple to wall and wall escutcheon.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Chicago Faucet Model No. 1000 thru 1018 b) T&S Brass Series 1300 c) Kohler K-7666 d) Brasscraft – SR19C

G. Traps:

1. Chrome plated cast brass adjustable “P” 17 gauge, chrome plated cast brass waste to wall. Install insulation on piping according to A.D.A.

Escutcheons: a) Chrome plated sheet steel with friction clips

H. Wall Valve Box:

1. Valve box shall be fabricated of No. 16 U.S Standard gauge steel with highly corrosive resistant epoxy finish. The overall size if the box shall not be more than 9: x 10-3/4”. Box shall contain ½” combination MPT brass sweat connection for hot water connection only.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Guy Gray Co.




I. Hose Bibbs ( Inside ):

1. Polished chromium plated with vacuum breaker, ¾” hose thread outlet with lock shield cap and removable tee hand

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Chicago Faucet No. 952

J. Wall Hydrants:

1. Provide ¾”encased flush anti-siphon wall hydrant non-freeze type with bronze casing, integral vacuum breaker. All bronze interior parts and non-turning operating rod with free floating compression closure valve. Box face and hinged cover be nickel bronze complete with operating key lock.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Zurn Z-1300 b) J.R. Smith

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 22 60 00 – MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

22 60 00 Medical Gas System Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 3

1.01 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Chemetron Medical Div:

a) Allied health care Products Inc.

B. Basic Pipes and Pipe Fittings 1. Wrought copper Fittings:

a) ASME B16.22 solder-joints, pressure type. Fittings may be factory cleaned ,purge and sealed for medical gas service according to ASTM B819

2. All piping and fittings shall be marked for the intended service per latest edition of NFPA 99C.

C. Joining materials:

1. Brazing filler Material AWS A5.8 B Cup (copper phosphorous series alloys). Flux is prohibited, except when used with bronze fittings.

2. Gasket Materials: a) ASME B16.21 non-metallic, flat, asbestos free and suitable

for oxygen use.

D. Valves and Valve Boxes: 1. Ball Valve: MSS SP-110. 2. Area Alarm Pane

a) AAP-1 Oxygen – Vacuum – Air - Oxygen Vacuum – Air 321-7725-98

3. AAP- 2 Oxygen - Vacuum – Air

E. Medical Gas Outlets: 1. Chemetron 500 Series Modular Quick-connect Medical Gas Outlet

Stations (Royal Oak). 2. Ohmedus quick-connect gas outlet (Troy). 3. Puritan-Bennett (Grosse Pointe) 4. Beacon Medaes (Macomb and West Bloomfield ASCs)

F. Medical Modular Head Wall:

1. The medical modular head mall shall be furnished by Owner and installed as a portion of work of this section and shall contain the medical gas outlets, electrical and communication devices as details on the architectural drawing.

2. The Chemetron 500 series (quick-connect) medical gas outlets shall be preinstalled and manifolded with type K medical copper tubing. The tubing shall be stubbed 4” above the top of the unit for single-point service connections. Installation and testing shall be done in accordance with NFPA 99.



1.02 MEDICAL AIR COMPRESSOR.

A Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Quincy Koblco 2. Lifeline ( Beacon Medical Products Fluid Energy)

1.03 MEDICAL VACUUM PUMPS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Quincy 2. Lifeline ( Beacon Medical Products Fluid Energy)

1.04 MEDICAL GASSES CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer prior to final punch, certification that the following tests are required by NFPA 99, have been completed. 1. Gas Systems Performance Criteria and Testing 2. General 3. Installer Performance Testing 4. Pressure Test (Initial) 5. Blowdown Test 6. Pressure Test 7. Piping Purge 8. Cross connection Test 9. System Verification 10. Cross Connection Test 11. Valve Test 12. Flow Test 13. Alarm Test 14. Piping Purge Test 15. Piping Purity Test 16. Final Tie-in Test 17. Operational Test 18. Medical Gas Operational Test 19. Medical Air Purity Test (Compressor) 20. Source Equipment Verification 21. Gas Supply Sources 22. Medical Air Compressor

B. All of the above system test shall be administered by a certified Medical Gas Inspection Company, not associated with the installing Contractor, with at least a minimum of 5 years experience.



C. Furnish and compile a verified last designating number and location of medical gas outlets. The Contractor shall review and check this list with the appropriate subcontractors and the medical gas system personnel performing the medical gas pipeline inspection.

D. Contractor shall perform mechanical check of medical gas outlets prior to

the certification inspection. Any necessary repairs or rework to be done prior to system supplier’s inspection shall be performed. Check shall include: 1. Outlets properly supported 2. Installation complete 3. Appropriate adapters fit and securely lock into place.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 23 00 00 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 3

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Facilities in Royal Oak /Troy, MI. shall be designed for the following conditions:

OUTSIDE INSIDE

1. Summer Dry Bulb 95°F 72°F

2. Wet Bulb 73°F 63°F

3. Winter Dry Bulb -10°F 72°F

1.02 STATIC PRESSURES

A. High estimated static pressures for fans and head pressures for pumps cause larger than necessary fans, pumps and motors, which waste energy and unnecessarily increase size of electrical service. Calculate realistic static pressures without double safety factors. Ductwork and piping pressure calculations shall be available to Planning, Design and Construction upon request.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Steam System

1. Central steam will generally be supplied saturated at 40 psig to 125 psig. The engineer is responsible for ensuring that all aspects of the steam system design are consistent with the maximum pressures and temperatures.

2. Heating equipment shall be sized for load purposes at 60 psig inlet

to building PRV station. Process equipment and domestic water heaters shall be sized for 15 psig inlet to PRV (summer condition).

B. Chilled Water System:

1. Contact Facilities Development technical service for deviation from

the Standard Chilled Water System Drawing.

2. All building connections shall follow the Building Chilled Water System Schematic.



C. Filters 1. Pre Filters shall have a minimum efficiency of 35% and final filter to

be minimum 95% efficient. Provide recessed magnehelic gauge across all filter banks.

D. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units

1. Computer room air conditioning units shall be Liebert or ATS. 2. Humidifiers within the units shall be electrode type, NOT infrared. 3. Reheat shall be by hot water where possible. 4. Liquid sensors shall be installed below the floor.

E. Coils

1. All coils shall be rated for 150 psi operating pressure. 2. All coils (with the exception of small fan coils 200-1200 cfm) shall

have copper tubes and return bends with a minimum thickness of .035". Headers shall be non-ferrous. Fin spacing should not exceed 12 FPI. Fin spacing of 10 FPI or less is preferred. Standard tubing wall thickness is acceptable in 200-1200 cfm fan coil units by approved manufacturers.

F. Closed Loop Hydronic Systems

1. Expansion tanks shall be the diaphragm type and pre-charge

pressure shall be specified to suit the system. Air elimination shall be installed in each heating system at the point of lowest air solubility and vented to atmosphere. A chemical pot feeder shall be installed across the hot water pump.

2. Hydronic loops with pumps larger than 2 hp shall be equipped with

variable frequency drives regulating loop differential pressure.

G. Dampers 1. Outside air dampers shall include seals to provide a tight closing

low leakage damper. Dampers shall not leak in excess of 4 CFM per square foot when closed against 4 i.w.g.



H. Unit Heaters 1. Unit heaters shall in general control space temperature by cycling

the fan.

2. Unit heaters shall be shut off on the steam/water side if the outside air temperature exceeds 55°F, or via seasonal cycling from the DDC; leaving the units continuously hot throughout the year is not acceptable. Reference Section 23 09 01 - Controls for valve requirements.

3. Unit heater isolation valves shall be ball valves with filled Teflon seats.

4. Steam unit heater traps shall be F&T type with strainer.

5. Hot water unit heaters are preferred over steam whenever possible.


SECTION 23 00 01 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

23 00 01 Basic Mechanical Requirements Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 9

Part 1: GENERAL 1.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS

A. All mechanical equipment shall be within Mechanical Equipment Rooms

(MER). Generally, rooftop units are not acceptable—exceptions requires Facilities Development – Technical Services approval.

B. Mechanical Equipment Rooms shall be large enough to encourage proper

servicing of equipment, allow for future growth, and include access for replacement of all mechanical equipment. Mechanical Rooms must be accessible by a standard stair or elevator. Ship’s ladders and steep stairs are NOT acceptable. Doors shall be a minimum of 72” doublewide. Adjoining pieces of equipment shall be separated by a minimum of three feet. Provide space to store two changes of air filters, lubricants, etc.

C. Mechanical Rooms shall be well-lighted using fluorescent lamps with a

minimum of 35 foot candles, maintained 2.5’ above floor. Lighting shall be switched at each exit. Similarly, adequate electrical outlets should be provided in the MERs, including a 50-amp welder outlet.

D. Floor drains are required. They are to be connected to the sanitary sewer

system: not to any storm sewer. Do not run cooling coil condensate drains across mechanical room floor. Any floor drain that is designed to be a receiver of indirect waste shall be a floor sink style fixture.

E. MERs above the lowest floor shall be water proofed and all floor

penetrations sleeved to 2” above the floor. Thermally and acoustically insulate MERs under occupied areas. Provide thermostatically controlled ventilation as required.

F. All un-insulated, uncoated steel components installed by the mechanical

contractor should be primed and finish painted with two coats of alkyd enamel (i.e., supports, hangers, etc)

1.02 SYSTEMS

A. System design and equipment selection shall be determined by minimum life cycle cost including first, operating and maintenance costs.

B. Generally, medical offices and classrooms shall be conditioned by variable

air volume systems with 100% economizer capability. Laboratories, animal rooms and other areas requiring high ventilation rates shall include reheat as necessary acceptable. All systems shall have individual temperature control with cooling and heating controlled in sequence with dead band.




Provide night setback with manual override when appropriate. Perimeter zones shall be heated by hot water radiation.

C. Provide capability to shut-down air supply, return and exhaust systems in

unoccupied parts of the building. D. Outside air intakes shall be at 12’-0” above the grade, remote from

automotive exhausts. Laboratory general exhaust hoods shall exhaust above the roof. Structure to contain the supply air and related equipment.

E. Supplemental units are acceptable for “Equipment room” with electronic

equipment as well as other critical areas that are required to have dual cooling system for backup. Also, provide suitable temperature control. Cooling coil condensate drains shall be no smaller than 3/4” diameter. All coils shall be of the “Low flow” or “high water temperature rise” type with temperature rises selected as high as practical (minimum of 10o F, minimum of 4 rows). Installation shall require extended drain pans with the control valve over the pan. Condensate piping should be run through dedicated insulated copper lines to sanitary drain risers. Condensate piping should be run through dedicated insulated copper lines to sanitary floor drain or sink and provide 1 1/2 air gap.

F. Generally spaces shall be humidified to 35% humidity and special areas

will require higher. Level of humidity as per latest addition of MDCIS / HFES.

G. Power house steam shall be released through humidifiers.

1.03 UTILITIES

A. Meter each utility B. Protect exposed, underground steel piping systems with cathodic

protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

Products Manufacturers Air Blenders Blender Projects Air Filters Farr (C70) Frame – 8 Universal

Cambridge Puyolator Filters




Products Manufacturers Air Flow Measuring Air Monitor

Cambridge EBTRON (Electronic Air Flow Measurement System)

Air Handling Units Energy Lab M&I TMI Ventrol

Air Handling Unit / Energy Recovery Wheel

Veenmar Semco

Air Outlets Titus Krueger Price

Access Doors (In-Duct Work) Air Balance Inc. Louvar and Dampers Ruskin

Air Vents Armstrong Machine Works Hoffman Specialty ITT Spirax Sarco

Backflow Preventers (Reduced Pressure)

Watts

Balancing Valves, Water Armstrong B&G Griswold Tour & Anderson (Victaulic)

Boilers Gas (Heating Hot Water ) Bryant Cleaver Brook

Boilers (Steam) Bryant Cleaver Brook

Booster Reheat Coils Aerofins Heatcraft Trane Nailor

Cathodic Protection Harco, Inc Chemical Feeders Culligan USA

Vulan Laboratories Your-Shipley Inc.

Coils, Cooling & Heating (Air Handling Unit)

Aerofin Heatcraft Mammoth Trane Ventrol




Products Manufacturers Computer Room AC Units ATS

Liebert Dampers Louver & Damper

Ruskin TAMPCO

Dampers Actuators Johnson Controls (Pneumatic) Trane (Electric) TAMPCO

Domestic Water Mixing Valves Leonard Symmons RADA

Domestic Water Heaters Aerco Lochinvar Patterson Kelley

Drinking Fountain Haws Corporation Elkay

Emergency Eyewash Bradley Haws

Emergency Shower Bradley Haws

Expansion Joints (outside Buildings) Advanced Thermal System Fans, Centrifugal Acme

Barry Twin City

Fan Coil Units McQuay International Sterling

Fans, Plug, Fan Twin City Greenheck Woods

Fans, Roof Exhaust Acme Greenheck Loren Cook

Fin Tube Sterling Ted Reed Thermal Vulcan

Fire Dampers Air Balance Inc. Louver and Dampers Ruskin

Fire Dampers Air Balance Inc. Ruskin Co Greenheck

Fire Protection Equipment Reliable Grinnell Viking




Products Manufacturers Flood Drain Josam. Smith (Jay R)

Wade Zurn

Flexible Duct Genflex Flexmaster Wiremold

Garbage Disposal In-Sink Erator Waste King

Gauges & thermometers Taylor Trerice

Heat Exchangers, Plate Alfa Laval APV Crepaco Bell & Gossett

Heat Exchangers, Shell & Tube Armstrong Bell & Gossett Patterson Kelley

Humidifiers Armstrong Dristeam Nortec

Humidity Sensors VAISALA,Inc Insulation Armstrong (Armaflex)

Johns-Manville Owens-Corning

Instant Hot Water Dispenser In-Sink Erator Interceptors Rockford Lavatory Trim Chicago

T & S Louvers American Warming

Green Heck Ruskin

Mechanical Air Compressor Quincy Kaeser

Mechanical Air Desiccant Dominic Hunter Great Lake

Mechanical Air Dryer Dominic Hunter Great Lakes

Medical Air Compressor Quincy Koblco Life Line (Beacon Medaus)

MedicMedical Gas Outlet Allied Healtcare Product Inc. Chemetron Medical (Royal Oak) Beacon Medical (Troy)

Medical Gas Certification Medical Gas Management LLC (800) 732-9035




Products Manufacturers Medical Vacuum Pumps Quincy

Life Line (Beacon Medaus) Meters, Chilled Water Daniel Industries – flow

straightener Deban enterprises – temp. transmitters Sensors and wells VORTAB, Inc.

Meters, Steam Condensate EMCO Meters, Water Badger

Yaskawa Motors GE

Linchon Motors Reliance U.S. Motor

Motor Starters Allen Bradley Cutler Hammer General Electric Square D

Motorized Control Dampers Air Balance Inc Ruskin Company TAMCO

Pipe, Steam Condensate, Direct Buried

Ecopipe Rovanco Insul-8 Rmeron (Bonstrand)

Pipe, Polypropylene Enfield Plumbing Drains & Supports Josam

Smith Wade Zurn

Plumbing Fixtures American Standard Crane Kohler

Plumbing Flush Valves Sloan Zurn

Pressure Transmitters MAMAC Pumps, Steam Condensate Domestic ITT

Bell & Gossett ITT Hoffman Specialty ITT

Pumps, Sump Gorman-Rupp Pumps, Water (Hot & Cold: End Suction) or Vertical in-Line

Armstrong Bell & Gossett

Pumps, Water (Hot & Cold Horizontal Split Case)

Armstrong Bell & Gossett




Products Manufacturers Pressure Regulating Valves Armstrong

Hoffman Spirax Sarco

Radiant Ceiling Panels Sun-EL Corporation

Roof Curb Pate Thycurb

Rooftop Air Handling Unit AAON Venmar Mammoth & Carrier

Safety Pressure Relief Valve Armstrong Spirax Sarco Spencer Engineering Co.

Showerheads Sloan # AC-11-B-3

Smoke Dampers Air Balance Inc. Louver and Dampers Ruskin

Smoke / Fire Dampers Air Balance Inc. Louver and Dampers Ruskin

Sound Traps IAC (Industrial Accoustic Comp.) Gale

Steam Condensate Traps Armstrong Sarco Hoffmann ITT

Steam and Condensate Pumps Domestic Pump ITT. Steam Pressure Reducing Valves Kunkle

Spence Strainers Armstrong

Hoffmann ITT Spirax Sarco

Temperature Controls Trane Test Ports B&G

Peterson Equipment Sisco Trerice

Thermostatic Temperature Control Valves

Trane Johnson Control

Unit Heaters Modine Sterling Trane




Products Manufacturers Valves, Ball Apollo

Grinnell NIBCO

Valves, Resilient seated Keystone NIBCO

Valves, Segmented Ball Control Neles – Jamesbury Variable Frequency Drives w/ Bypass General Electric

Square D Yaskawa

Vibration Isolators Mason Vibration Eliminator Vibration Mounting

Volume Dampers Ruskin Vent Product Air Balance Inc.

Water Closet Seats Beneke Church Olsonite

Water Closets / Urinal Flush Valves Sloan (Royal-lloyd) Zurn (Z-600-OXL)

Water Coolers Elkay Halsey Taylor Oasis

Water Treatment Drew Chemical Nutmeg Chemical

Water Valves, Underground (Direct Buried) (Coordinate with authority having jurisdiction)

East Jordan Mueller Traver City

2.02 MOTORS

A. Motors below 1/2 HP shall be 120/1/60. Motors 1/2 HP and above shall be 200/3/60 on 208/3/60, 230/3/60 on 240/3/60 or 460/3/60 on 480/3/60 volt systems, 208/230 volt dual range motors are not preferred. Motors shall be of the premium efficiency, high power factor type for minimum life cycle costs. Guaranteed minimum motor efficiencies, based upon IEEE tested method 112-b, shall be listed for each motor on the project and shall not be less than the following for 1800 RPM motors.

HP EFF 1 82.5 1.5 82.5 2 82.5 3 86.5 5 86.5




HP EFF 7.6 88.5 10 88.5 15 90.2 20 91.0 25 91.7 30 91.7 40 92.4 60 93.0 75 93.6 100 93.6 125 93.6 150 94.1 200 94.1

B. The engineer shall note that the operating speeds for high efficiency

motors are higher than standard speeds. Overloads can result. C. Six-pulse variable speed drives are addressed under section 16450 –

Variable Speed Drives. D. While a multi-speed motor is required, strong consideration should be

given to utilizing a single speed motor as described in 2.02 A and a variable speed drive.

2.02 DRIVE GUARDS

1. All drives shall be provided with suitable and adequate guards enclosing

the far shaft and the coupling (if any), the belt, the drilling and drilling pullies. Guards shall be of 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel or other approved material, securely fastened in place and provided with swing covers at each graft, center and at points requiring guards shall be designed, constructed and installed in compliance with OSHA requirements.


SECTION 23 00 02 – BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS

23 00 02 Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 JOINT SEALERS

A. Refer to Division 7 Sections "Joint Sealants" and "Firestopping" for specifics regarding joint sealants, joint fillers, material colors, and other related materials.

1.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Panels".

1. Size shall be not less than 24" x 24".

1.03 PIPE JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials:

1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

B. Brazing Materials:

1. Comply with SFAA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined.

C. Soldering Materials:

1. Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder appropriate for each respective system.

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints:

1. Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B 16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried.

E. Press Fit Mechanical Fittings

1. Supply and distribution joints between copper or copper-alloy tubing

(types K & L hard drawn ½” – 4” id. or coiled annealed tubing ½” – 1” id.) shall be permitted to be made with “Viega” press fit mechanical fittings with “Smart Connect” feature. Other fitting manufactures that meet identical design specifications will be permitted upon BSC Standards Committee review and approval. Mechanical joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Upon pressing, each fitting shall be marked with an “X” using a permanent marker.




1.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Escutcheons:

1. Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

a) Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b) Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. c) Grinnell Co.

B. Unions:

1. Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure service; hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products of one of the following:

a) Grinnell Co. b) Eclipse, Inc. c) Perfection Corp.

C. Dielectric Unions:

1. Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe

materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,


a) Eclipse Inc. b) Perfection Corp.




D. Y-Type Strainers:

1. General:

a) Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel, with 3/64" perforations at 233 per square inch.

b) Provide strainers with 125 psi working pressure rating for low pressure applications, and 250 psi pressure rating for high pressure application.

2. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer

with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 3. Threaded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer

with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 4. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer

with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 5. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger for Low Pressure Application:

Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

6. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger for High Pressure Application:

Schedule 80 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

7. Grooved Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile-iron or malleable-

iron body and access end cap, access coupling with EDPM gasket. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,


a) Grinnell Gruvlok Co. b) Hoffman Specialty ITT. c) Victaulic Co. of America (low pressure applications only).

1.05 SLEEVES

A. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A 53, Grade

A. C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking

synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.




D. Fire Barrier Sleeves, Sealers, Etc.: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section, "Firestopping".

1.06 WATER SHIELD/DRAIN PANS

A. Water shield/drain pans shall be constructed of minimum 16 gage galvanized sheet metal. Provide a 1" raised lip around perimeter. Provide bottom outlet or open channel outlet on low end - as indicated on drawings. Provide a water shield/drain pan under all water and/or steam piping which is installed above motor starters, electrical substations, transformers or other electrical equipment.

1.07 DRIVE GUARDS

A. All drives shall be provided with suitable and adequate guards enclosing the shaft, the coupling (if any), the belt, the driving and the driven pulleys. Guards shall be of 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel or other approved material, securely fastened in place, and provided with swing covers at each shaft center and at points requiring lubrication. Provide holes in all guards for tachometer readings. Guards shall be designed, constructed and installed in compliance with OSHA requirements.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 23 05 48 - MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL

23 05 48 Mechanical Sound & Vibration Control Issue Date 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 1

A. All mechanical equipment shall be provided with vibration isolation to isolate the equipment from the building structure to prevent the transmission of mechanically generated sound and vibration too the building structure. Specific types of mounting bases vibration isolation pads flexible pipe connectors, pipe hanger, duct hanger, sound attenuators, etc. are project specific and are engineer responsibility to size and specify. The engineer of record should review and recommend to the owner the specific devices being proposed at the beginning of every project.

B. In general the following mechanical equipment is to be provided with sound

vibration isolation: 1. Centrifugal Chillers 2. Reciprocating Refrigeration Compressors 3. All Pumps 4. Tubular and Axial fans 5. Utility fans Sets 6. Centrifugal Roof Fans 7. All In-Line Fans 8. Air Handling Units 9. Packaged Air Medical Gas Compressors 10. Cooling Tower Fans 11. Air Cooled Condensing Unit 12. Dry Coolers 13. Ceiling Mounted Fan Coil Units 14. Cabinet fans

C. All piping that is connected to mechanical equipment that is provided with

vibration control devices shall be provided isolation hangers for no less that the first 20’-0’ nearest to the equipment. Particular attention should be paid to the isolation if piping risers entering and exiting Mechanical Equipment Rooms for vibration and sound transmission at the floor penetrations.

D. Ductwork shall be isolated from the air- handling unit and in-line fans. E. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. Mason Industries Inc. 2. Peabody Noise Control, Inc. 3. Vibration Eliminator Co. 4. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 23 05 53 - MECHANICAL PIPING IDENTIFICATION

23 05 53 Mechanical Piping Identification Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 1 of 3

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMERY COMMENTS.

A. Pipe and equipment identification markers are to be black letters and numbers on background color bend with letters size as follows.

OUTSIDE DIAMETER

OF PIPE OR COVERING

LENGTH OF COLOR FIELD

SIZE OF LETTERS

¾” to 1-1/4” 8” ½” 1-1/2” to 2” 8” ¾” 2-1/2” to 6” 12” 1-1/2”

8” to 10” 24” 2-1/2” Over 10: 32” 3-1/2”

B. Flow direction arrows 1-1/8” X 4-1/2” with black letters on color background. C. Approved manufacturers: Brady Style B-500,B-350 or B-915 Snap-on, or

Seton Snap Around. D. All equipment identification is to 1” high black letters on color background

engraved on bakelite of glass resin system. Provide identification tags for each major piece of equipment.

1.02 Pipe identification Color Schedule:

IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR Acetylene Yellow Acid Waste Yellow Acid Vent Yellow Blow- off Water Yellow Boiler Feed water Yellow Carbonated Water Yellow Compressed Air Green Cold Water Green Non-Potable Water Yellow Chilled Water Supply Green Chilled Water Return Green Chiller Purge Green Condenser Water Supply Green Condenser Water Return Green Condensate return Yellow D.I water Green Emergency Generator Exhaust Yellow Fan Coil Supply Yellow Fan Coil return Green



IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR Filter Water Blue Fire Stand Pipe Red w/ white letters Fire Sprinkler Pipe Red w/ white letters Fuel Oil Yellow Glycol Supply Yellow w/Black letters Glycol Return Yellow w/Black letters Natural Gas Pink H.P.Air Green Heating Supply Yellow Heating Return Yellow Hot Water Green Hydrogen Yellow Lab Air Yellow Lawn Sprinkler Green Nitrogen Black w/ white Nitrous Oxide Blue w/ white letters Oxygen Green Propane Yellow Pumped Condensate Yellow Radiation Return Green Rain Conductor Green Recirculating Hot Water Green Refrigerant Liquid Yellow Refrigerant Suction Yellow Refrigerant Gas Yellow Soil and Waste Green Steam Yellow Tempered Water Green Vacuum (Suction) White Vapor Vent Yellow Vent Green Waste Anesthetic Gas (WAGD) White Red Letters Well Water Green

B. Mark all piping on both sides of partitions and slabs, at take offs, valves,

connections to equipment and at intervals not to exceed 20’-0” and at least once in every room. Install flow direction arrows immediately adjacent to all pipe identification markers.



C. Valve Identification Tags:

1. Non ferrous metal of Bakelite or glass fiber reinforced system of tag material stamped, engraved of embedded with identification letters and numbers and chain of wire for attachment.

2. Each valve shall be provided with prefix letter designation followed by

a sequence number. Prefix must conform to the following.

SERVICE PREFIX LETTER a) Plumbing P b) Heating H c) Temp. Control T d) Fire protection F e) Refrigeration R

D. The owner will provide the sequence number.


23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 26

1.01 This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives. The Owner’s Vendor will hold this Work. This Contract shall be responsible to work with the Owner's Test and Balance Contractor to achieve the following: A. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including

submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.

B. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. C. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. D. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. E. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. F. Measuring sound and vibration. G. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.02 Related Sections include the following:

A. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.

B. Field quality control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system

and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

1.03 Definitions A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal

equipment, such as to reduce fans speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including

submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or

more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work

operations to yield repeatable results. E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of

measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.




G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted

conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the

performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy,

enters or leaves the distribution system. J. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or

equipment. L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for

performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute. P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National

Association. 1.04 Submittals:

A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice

to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the

Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's

Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of

reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.




E. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.

1.05 Quality Assurance

A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by NEBB.

B Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and

the Architect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

B. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

1. Submittal distribution requirements. 2. Contract Documents examination report. 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan. 4. Work schedule and Project site access requirements. 5. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 6. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the

testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to

prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with

the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from

NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months

or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1.06 Project Conditions

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the

building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.




1.07 Coordination A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for

systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled

test dates and times. C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests

on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.08 Warranty A. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that

NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to

the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within

design and installation limits. 1.09 Examination

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project

requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary

Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,

thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section

"Project Record Documents." D. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system

descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.




E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are

complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated

balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by

adjusting and balancing. J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been

installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing

boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are

airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of

diverting or mixing fluid flows. O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean

and straight fins. P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in

the suction piping. Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety

interlocks and controls.




R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the

intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for

tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multi-zone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the

Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record

system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.

9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to

design values. 11. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of

testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

1.10 Preparation

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness

reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are

operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments

are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system

operations can be met.

1.11 General Testing and Balancing Procedures A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to

the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.




B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent

identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

1.12 Fundamental Air Systems' Balancing Procedures

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's

outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct

airflow measurements. E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and

the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor

starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal

protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

1.13 Constant-Volume Air Systems' Balancing Procedures

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-,

and exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multi-zone, dual-duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.




B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as

follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the

fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch

ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing

damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is

unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.




E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within

specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified

tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2 Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

1.14 Variable-Air-Volume Systems' Additional Procedures

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is

more than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air

dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow

and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.

4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the

condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.




7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data. 1.15 Fundamental Procedures For Hydronic Systems

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence

starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the

following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure

for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and

set at design flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential

pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

1.16 Hydronic Systems' Balancing Procedures

A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for

positive-displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve

closed. Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.




3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first

balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged

flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to

achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate

as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over

design flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the

highest percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the

conclusions of balancing.

1.17 Variable-Flow Hydronic Systems' Additional Procedures A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting

systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

1.18 Primary-Secondary-Flow Hydronic Systems' Additional Procedures

A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.

1.19 Heat Exchangers

A. Measure water flow through all circuits. B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.




D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of

automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.

E. Record safety valve settings. F. Verify operation of steam traps.

1.20 Motors A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the

following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

1.21 Chillers

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within

specified tolerances of design flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions: 1. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow. 2. Condenser water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures,

using instruments furnished by the chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for

measuring kW. 5. The kW input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for

measuring kW. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 7. Air-Cooled Chillers: Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan

data, including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.




1.22 Cooling Towers A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and then make sure the

makeup and blow-down systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results: 1. Measure condenser water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. 2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air. 4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air. 5. Measure condenser water flow rate recirculating through the

cooling tower. 6. Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure. 7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup-water system.

1.23 Boilers

A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

1.24 Heat-Transfer Coils

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils

designed for less than 7500 cfm. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each

incremental stage. 5. Calculated kW at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

1.25 Temperature Testing

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in

temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a

period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

1.26 Fume Hoods




A. Determine total airflow into the room where the fume hood is located and

balance systems to ensure adequate air supply to all hoods. B. Set fume-hood door opening at position of normal use. C. Energize the exhaust fan and adjust airflow to provide the indicated

average fume-hood face velocity at hood opening. D. Measure exhaust airflow volume by measuring airflow by Pitot-tube duct

traverse. E. Measure air velocity using Pitot-tube traverse method. F. Record each face velocity measurement taken at 4- to 6-inch increments

over the entire hood door opening. G. Calculate the average face velocity by averaging all velocity

measurements. H. Calculate the airflow volume of exhaust-hood face velocity by multiplying

the calculated average face velocity by the opening area. Compare this quantity with exhaust volume at exhaust fan and report duct leakage.

I. Measure airflow volume supplied by makeup fan. Verify that the makeup

system supplies the proper amount of air to keep the space at the indicated pressure with the exhaust systems in all operating conditions.

J. Retest for average face velocity. Adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and

other parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity and the indicated auxiliary air-supply percentages.

K. Retest and adjust the systems until fume-hood performance complies with

Contract Documents.

1.27 Temperature-Control Verification

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would

adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and

actual measurements. D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature

controllers). E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper

and valve operators.




F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer

operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the

system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe

operations. 1.28 Tolerances

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

1.29 Reporting

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract

Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe

completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

1.30 Final Report

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on

standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.




B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

C. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of

calibration. D. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include

the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not

include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.

E. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies

the report. 10. Summary of contents, including the following:

a) Design versus final performance. b) Notable characteristics of systems. c) Description of system operation sequence if it varies from

the Contract Documents. 11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and

fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary

from design values. 14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the

following: a) Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b) Conditions of filters. c) Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d) Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e) Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of

maximum pitch diameter. f) Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.




g) Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h) Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

15. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following: a) Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. b) Water and steam flow rates. c) Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. d) Pipe and valve sizes and locations. e) Terminal units. f) Balancing stations.

E. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include

the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) Unit identification. b) Location. c) Make and type. d) Model number and unit size. e) Manufacturer's serial number. f) Unit arrangement and class. g) Discharge arrangement. h) Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i) Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of

adjustments in inches. j) Number of belts, make, and size. k) Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data: Include the following: a) Make and frame type and size. b) Horsepower and rpm. c) Volts, phase, and hertz. d) Full-load amperage and service factor. e) Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f) Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of

adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a) Total airflow rate in cfm. b) Total system static pressure in inches wg. c) Fan rpm. d) Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e) Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f) Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g) Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h) Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i) Outside airflow in cfm. j) Return airflow in cfm.




k) Outside-air damper position. l) Return-air damper position. m) Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following: a) System identification. b) Location. c) Coil type. d) Number of rows. e) Fin spacing in fins per inch. f) Make and model number. g) Face area in sq. ft. h) Tube size in NPS. i) Tube and fin materials. j) Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Airflow rate in cfm. b) Average face velocity in fpm. c) Air pressure drop in inches wg. d) Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e) Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f) Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g) Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h) Water flow rate in gpm. i) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j) Entering-water temperature in deg F. k) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l) Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m) Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n) Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o) Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the

manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) System identification. b) Location. c) Make and type. d) Model number and unit size. e) Manufacturer's serial number. f) Fuel type in input data. g) Output capacity in Btuh. h) Ignition type. i) Burner-control types. j) Motor horsepower and rpm.




k) Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l) Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m) Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n) Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of

adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a) Total airflow rate in cfm. b) Entering-air temperature in deg F. c) Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d) Air temperature differential in deg F. e) Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f) Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g) Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h) Low-fire fuel input in Btuh. i) High-fire fuel input in Btuh. j) Manifold pressure in psig. k) High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l) Operating set point in Btuh. m) Motor voltage at each connection. n) Motor amperage for each phase. o) Heating value of fuel in Btuh.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a) System identification. b) Location. c) Make and type. d) Model number and size. e) Manufacturer's serial number. f) Arrangement and class. g) Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h) Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of

adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a) Make and frame type and size. b) Horsepower and rpm. c) Volts, phase, and hertz. d) Full-load amperage and service factor. e) Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f) Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of

adjustments in inches. g) Number of belts, make, and size.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Total airflow rate in cfm. b) Total system static pressure in inches wg.




c) Fan rpm. d) Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e) Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a

diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following:

a) System and air-handling unit number. b) Location and zone. c) Traverse air temperature in deg F. d) Duct static pressure in inches wg. e) Duct size in inches. f) Duct area in sq. ft. g) Design airflow rate in cfm. h) Design velocity in fpm. i) Actual airflow rate in cfm. j) Actual average velocity in fpm. k) Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) System and air-handling unit identification. b) Location and zone. c) Test apparatus used. d) Area served. e) Air-terminal-device make. f) Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g) Air-terminal-device type and model number. h) Air-terminal-device size. i) Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Airflow rate in cfm. b) Air velocity in fpm. c) Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d) Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e) Final airflow rate in cfm. f) Final velocity in fpm. g) Space temperature in deg F.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units,

include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) System and air-handling unit identification. b) Location and zone. c) Room or riser served.




d) Coil make and size. e) Flowmeter type.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Airflow rate in cfm. b) Entering-water temperature in deg F. c) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d) Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e) Entering-air temperature in deg F. f) Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

L. Packaged Chiller Reports: For each chiller, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following: a) Unit identification. b) Make and model number. c) Manufacturer's serial number. d) Refrigerant type and capacity in gal.. e) Starter type and size. f) Starter thermal protection size.

2. Condenser Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Refrigerant pressure in psig. b) Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c) Entering-water temperature in deg F. d) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e) Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

3. Evaporator Test Reports: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Refrigerant pressure in psig. b) Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c) Entering-water temperature in deg F. d) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e) Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.




4. Compressor Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Make and model number. b) Manufacturer's serial number. c) Suction pressure in psig. d) Suction temperature in deg F. e) Discharge pressure in psig. f) Discharge temperature in deg F. g) Oil pressure in psig. h) Oil temperature in deg F. i) Voltage at each connection. j) Amperage for each phase. k) The kW input. l) Crankcase heater kW. m) Chilled water control set point in deg F. n) Condenser water control set point in deg F. o) Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. p) Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.

5. Refrigerant Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Oil level. b) Refrigerant level. c) Relief valve setting in psig. d) Unloader set points in psig. e) Percentage of cylinders unloaded. f) Bearing temperatures in deg F. g) Vane position. h) Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F.

M. Cooling Tower or Condenser Test Reports: For cooling towers or

condensers, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) Unit identification. b) Make and type. c) Model and serial numbers. d) Nominal cooling capacity in tons. e) Refrigerant type and weight in lb. f) Water-treatment chemical feeder and chemical. g) Number and type of fans. h) Fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. i) Fan motor voltage at each connection. j) Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. k) Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of

adjustments in inches. l) Number of belts, make, and size.

2. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:




a) Make and model number. b) Manufacturer's serial number. c) Motor make and frame size. d) Motor horsepower and rpm. e) Voltage at each connection. f) Amperage for each phase. g) Water flow rate in gpm.

3. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Entering-water temperature in deg F. b) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c) Water temperature differential in deg F. d) Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. e) Leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. g) Water flow rate in gpm. h) Bleed water flow rate in gpm.

4. Air Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Duct airflow rate in cfm. b) Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c) Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. d) Average entering-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg F. e) Average leaving-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg F. f) Ambient wet-bulb temperature in deg F.

N. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For steam and hot-water heat

exchangers, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) Unit identification. b) Location. c) Service. d) Make and type. e) Model and serial numbers. f) Ratings.

2. Steam Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Inlet pressure in psig. b) Condensate flow rate in lb/h.

3. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Entering-water temperature in deg F. b) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c) Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. d) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. e) Water flow rate in gpm.

4. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:




a) Entering-water temperature in deg F. b) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c) Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. d) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. e) Water flow rate in gpm.

O. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate

impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves. 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) Unit identification. b) Location. c) Service. d) Make and size. e) Model and serial numbers. f) Water flow rate in gpm. g) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h) Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i) Pump rpm. j) Impeller diameter in inches. k) Motor make and frame size. l) Motor horsepower and rpm. m) Voltage at each connection. n) Amperage for each phase. o) Full-load amperage and service factor. p) Seal type.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Static head in feet of head or psig. b) Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c) Actual impeller size in inches. d) Full-open flow rate in gpm. e) Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f) Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g) Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h) Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i) Final water flow rate in gpm. j) Voltage at each connection. k) Amperage for each phase.




P. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a) Unit identification. b) Location. c) Service. d) Make and type. e) Model and serial numbers. f) Fuel type and input in Btuh. g) Number of passes. h) Ignition type. i) Burner-control types. j) Voltage at each connection. k) Amperage for each phase.

2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a) Operating pressure in psig. b) Operating temperature in deg F. c) Entering-water temperature in deg F. d) Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e) Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS. f) Safety valve settings in psig. g) High-limit setting in psig. h) Operating-control setting. i) High-fire set point. j) Low-fire set point. k) Voltage at each connection. l) Amperage for each phase. m) Draft fan voltage at each connection. n) Draft fan amperage for each phase. o) Manifold pressure in psig.

Q. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the

following: 1. Report Data: Include the following:

a) Instrument type and make. b) Serial number. c) Application. d) Dates of use. e) Dates of calibration.




1.31 Additional Tests

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures

were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.


23 07 00 MECHANICAL INSULATION

23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 7

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following systems and/or items of equipment with an abbreviation shown shall be insulated in accordance with these specifications:

1. Plumbing:

a) CW Cold Water b) HW Hot Water c) HWR Hot Water Return d) RC Horizontal Rain Conductor and Vertical

Lead to Roof Sump e) RS Roof Sumps Including Connecting Collar

to Pan f) FIXT Handicapped Lavatory and Sink

Exposed Water Supplies and Drain Piping.

g) TW Tempered Water

2. Heating Piping: a) HHWS & HHWR Heating Water Supply and Return. b) LPS Low Pressure Steam (0-15 psi). c) MPS Medium Pressure Steam (16-75 psi). d) HPS High Pressure Steam (76 - 200 psi). e) CR Condensate Return. f) PCR Pumped Condensate Return. g) PRV Pressure Reducing Valve(s)

3. Cooling Water Piping: a) CHWS & CHWR Chilled Water Supply and Return. b) COND Condensate Drain Pan Discharge.

4. Refrigeration Piping:

a) REF.S Refrigerant Suction

5. Ductwork: a) CND Concealed b) DCT Duct c) EXP Exposed d) OAI Outside Air Intake e) EXH Exhaust f) CND/DCT: All concealed conventional air handling

ducts and equipment except for outside air (OAI) ducts.

g) EXP/DCT: All exposed conventional air handling ducts and equipment except for outside air (OAI) ducts.

h) CND/OAI: All concealed outside air intake ducts, plenums and mixing boxes.

i) EXP/OAI: All exposed outside air intake ducts, plenums and mixing boxes.

j) OD/DCT: Ductwork located outdoors.




6. Cold Equipment (CE):

a) CE/DP Drip Pans Under Chilled Water Equipment

b) CE/DA Ductwork Equipment and Accessories

7. Hot Equipment (HE): a) HE/AS Air Separator b) HE/EXT Expansion Tanks c) HE/HTX Heat Exchangers d) HE/HWP Heating Water Pump e) HE/CT Condensate Receiver Tanks f) HE/FT Flash Tanks g) HE/ST Storage Tanks h) HE/WH Water Heater (not pre-insulated)

8. Other Abbreviations: a) Miscellaneous:

I. pcf Pounds Per Cubic Foot II. CBV Calibrated Balance Valve

b) Application Types:

I. PP Piping II. EQ Equipment

III. FT Fittings IV. FL Flanges V. FN Finish Application(s)

VI. SP Special Application(s)

c) Insulation Types: I. Fl/El Flexible Elastomeric

II. Fbg Mineral Glass Fiber (Fiberglass) III. Polyure Polyurethane IV. MCV Molded Closed Cell Vinyl V. Vnl/Plmr Vinyl Polymer

B. The following systems and/or items of equipment do not require

insulation:

1. Plumbing: a) Underground cold water piping. b) Exposed, chrome plated piping, except for handicapped

fixtures. c) Domestic hot water supply valves and unions. d) Domestic hot water return valves and unions. e) Horizontal rain conductors embedded in masonry. f) Vertical rain conductors. g) Drain and overflow lines from hot equipment. h) Piping downstream from safety relief valves, except as

otherwise specified herein. i) Sanitary waste and vent piping.




2. Heating Piping: a) Drain and overflow lines from hot equipment. b) Piping downstream from safety relief valves except as

otherwise specified herein. c) Heating hot water supply and return valves and unions

higher than 8’-0” above finished floor. d) Heating hot water supply and return piping within fin-tube

radiation covers and within equipment enclosures. e) Steam trap assemblies and fittings between unions on the

inlet and discharge sides of the trap. f) Coil casings and return bends on duct mounted re-heat coils. g) Heating hot water supply piping between control valve and

duct mounted hot water reheat coil, and radiant panels. h) Heating hot water return piping five feet (5’-0”) downstream

of duct mounted hot water reheat coil, and radiant panels.

3. Cooling Piping: a) Condensate drains, drain piping, and overflow lines from

cold equipment when lines are located over drain pans. b) Refrigerant hot gas piping outside air conditioned spaces.

Refrigerant piping located in plenum spaces must be insulated.

4. Ductwork:

a) Pre-insulated ductwork. b) HVAC return air ductwork within building. c) HVAC exhaust ductwork. Note: Exhaust ductwork within 20

feet of exit point (inside building from building must be insulated).

d) Outdoor exhaust ductwork. e) Smoke purge supply ductwork (SF-1 and SF-2 only)

downstream of duct mounted heating coil. f) HVAC relief ductwork between control dampers and

connection to return ductwork.

5. Equipment: a) Pre-insulated equipment.

PART 2 – Products 2.01 PRODUCTS AND APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Adhesives, Mastics, Coatings and Sealants: 1. Childers Products Company (216-953-5200) 2. H.B. Fuller Company (713-926-5200) 3. Vimasco Corporation (800-624-8288) 4. Marathon (912-956-5605)




B. Insulation Finishing Cements: 1. Ramco Insulation, Inc. (417-781-8855) 2. Fibrex Inc. (312-896-4800) 3. P.K. Insulation Mfg. Co. (800-641-4296) 4. Rock Wool Mfg. Co. (205-699-6121)

C. Canvas and Osnaburg Products: 1. Great Lakes Textiles, Inc. (800-374-1748) 2. S. Fattal Cotton, Inc. (800-361-9571)

D. Reinforcing Membranes for Mastics & Coatings:

1. Alpha Associates, Inc. (800-631-5399) 2. Childers Products Company (216-953-5200) 3. Vimasco Corporation (800-624-8288)

E. Insulation Fastening Systems Welded and Non-welded:

1. AGM Industries, Inc. (617-828-4705) 2. Erico Fastening Systems, Inc. (609-235-6900)

F. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation and Accessories:

1. Armstrong World Industries Product Division (717-396-4195) 2. Rubatex (703-586-2611)

G. Metal Pipe Jacketing and Accessory Products:

1. Childers Products Company (216-953-5200) 2. Pabco Industries (800-231-1024) 3. RPR Products (713-697-7003)

H. Mineral Fiber (Glass Type) Insulation Materials for Pipe, Duct and

Equipment: 1. Certainteed (215-341-7000) 2. Knauf Fiber Glass (GmbH) (317-398-4434) 3. Manville Corporation (800-654-3103) 4. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. (419-248-8000) 5. Manson Insulation Inc. (800-642-8721)

I. Molded Closed Cell Vinyl: 1. Truebro “Handi-Lav-Guard”. (800-340-5969) 2. TCI Products “Skal-Gard”. 925-472-9729)

J. Polyvinylchloride Products and Accessories:

1. Ceel Co. (800-525-0307) 2. H.B. Fuller Company’s “Speedline Products” (713-926-3125) 3. Manville Corporation’s “Zeston Products” (800-654-3103) 4. Proto Corporation (813-573-4665)

K. Polyurethane Foam Products: 1. FOMO Products, Inc. (800-321-5585) 2. RHH Foam Systems, Inc. (800-657-0702)




L. Soft Pad Removable Insulation Covers: 1. Insulation Fabricators, Inc. (312-375-5511) 2. O’Brian Corporation (314-645-8080) 3. Ohio Valley Industrial Services (412-269-0020)

M. Insulation Finish Tapes, ASJ/SSL and FSK/SSL:

1. Childers Products Company (216-953-5200) 2. COMPAC Corporation (201-347-3900) 3. Venture Tape Corporation (617-331-5900)

N. Pre-insulated Hanger Supports: 1. Pipe Shields, Inc. (800-538-7007) 2. ISSI Product, Inc. (303-937-7893)

O. Cork Insulation Tape:

1. Permatite (612-882-0916)

P. Valve Stem Washers: 1. Garlock (800-448-6688)

Q. Caulk:

1. Red Devil (918-825-5744) 2.02 INSULATION SYSTEMS SCHEDULE

SYSTEM TEMP RANGE (DEG F)

MATERIAL SIZE (INCHES) THICKNESS/ DENSITY

APPLICATION PROCEDURES

CW 50 to 60 same

Fbg same

All All

1” / 4.5 pcf 2” / 1.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-11 w/FN-9

TW 50 to 90 same

Fbg Same

All All

1” / 4.5 pcf 2” / 1.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-11 w/FN-9

CHWS/CHWR 40 to 55 same

Fbg Same

All All

1” / 4.5 pcf 2” / 1.52 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-11 w/FN-9

SP-7 RC 33 to 60 Fbg All 1” / 4.5 pcf PP-1, FT-1

(Note: Insulate horizontal pipe, vertical lead to sump & fittings only.) RS 33 to 60 FI/EI All 0.75 / 6 pcf SP-1 or SP-2

FIXT 40 to 140 MCV All 1/8” FT-75 COND 40 to 60 Fbg All 1” / 4.5 pcf PP-1, FT-1 REF.S 35 to 50 FI/EI All 0.75” / 6 pcf PP-2, FT-2, FL-2

HW/HWR 80 to 210 same

Fbg Fbg

.5 – 2 2.5 & up

1” / 4.5 pcf 1.5” / 4.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-9

HHWS/HHWR 80 to 180 same

Fbg Fbg

.5 – 2 2.5 & up

1” / 4.5 pcf 1.5” / 4.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-9

LPS To 240 same same

Fbg Fbg Fbg

.5 – 2 2.5 -6

8” & up

1” / 4.5 pcf 2” / 4.5 pcf

3.5” / 4.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1, FL-9 same same

MPS To 305 same same

Fbg Fbg Fbg

.5 – 2 1.25 - 4 5 & up

2” / 4.5 pcf 2.5 / 4.5 pcf 3” / 4.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-12 w/FN-9

same PRV (valve) Same Fbg All 2” / 2.4 pcf FL-9

(Note: Provide sound lining 25 feet up and down stream of PRV valve.) HPS To 450

same same same

Fbg Fbg Fbg

Vnl/Plmr

.5 – 2 2.5 – 4 5 & up

All

2.5” / 4.5 pcf 3” / 4.5 pcf

3.5” / 4.5 pcf 2 pcf

PP-1, FT-1 FL-12 w/Fn-9

same SP-17




SYSTEM TEMP RANGE (DEG F)

MATERIAL SIZE (INCHES) THICKNESS/ DENSITY

APPLICATION PROCEDURES

CR/PC To 210 Same

Fbg Fbg

.5 – 2 2.5 & up

1” / 4.5 pcf 1.5” / 4.5 pcf

PP-1, FT-1, FL-9 same

CND/DCT 60 to 110 Fbg All 1.5” / 1 pcf DC-1 EXP/DCT (Note #1)

60 to 110 Fbg All 1.5” / 3 pcf DC-14. FN-18

EXP/DCT (Note #2)

60 to 110 Fbg All 1.5” / 1 pcf DC-1

CND/OAI -20 to 110 Fbg All 2” / 1.5 pcf DC-1 EXP/OAI (Note #1)

-20 to 110 Fbg All 2” / 6 pcf DC-14 w/FN-16 & FN-18

EXP/OAI (Note #2)

-20 to 110 Fbg All 2” / 1.5 pcf DC-1

OD/DCT -20 to 110 Fbg All 1.5” / 3 pcf DC-14 w/FN-30 & FN-31 or FN-34

CE/DA 40 to 60 Fbg & FI/EI All 0.75” / 6 pcf EQ-24 HE/AS To 210 Fbg All 1.5” / 4.5 pcf EQ-1 w/FN-31

HE/EXT To 210 Fbg All 1.5” / 6 pcf EQ-1 w/FN-31 HE/HTX To 240 Fbg All 3” / 4.5 pcf EQ-1 w/FN-31, EQ-9 HE/CT To 210 Fbg All 1.5” / 6 pcf EQ-1 w/FN-31 HE/WH To 210 Fbg All 1.5” / 6 pcf EQ-1 w/FN-31

CBV To 210 Polyure All that are not provided with

factory supplied covers

1.5 min. FT 80

Note #1: Applies to exposed ductwork located between floor level and eight feet (8’-0”) above finished floor level.

Note #2: Applies to exposed ductwork located above eight feet (8’-0”) above finished floor level. 2.03 INSULATION JACKETS

A. Jackets for hot piping shall be factory applied, white, all service jackets composed of reinforced kraft paper and a self-sealing, pressure sensitive longitudinal lap seal.

B. Jackets for cold piping shall be the same as for hot piping with the addition

of a vapor barrier. Seal all butt joints with 4” wide strips of vapor barrier sealed with vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Jacketing in high traffic areas shall be covered with aluminum or PVC.

2.04 FITTINGS, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. When available, insulate fittings with factory pre-molded fittings of the

same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. B. When pre-molded fittings are unavailable, use a hydraulic setting cement

paste. C. Insulation for cold piping shall be complete with continuous vapor barrier.

Clamps and anchors on cold piping shall be insulated. Full taping of pre-molded fittings is required.

D. Armaflex (25/50 fire rated) insulation is acceptable in lieu of fiberglass on

cold piping. Use the same thickness as specified for fiberglass.




E. Insulation at pipe strainer flanges shall be arranged for ease of servicing. F. Insulation and vapor barriers shall be properly protected at all hangers and

penetrations. G. Insulated valves shall have extended handle stems so all operators or

handles are outside of the insulation system. This is particularly true of high pressure steam piping.

H. Provide factory manufactured removable covers on all steam PRV’s

constructed with 2” TEMPMAT insulation, fiberglass cloth, stainless steel grommets, and stitching. Cold side shall be silicone impregnated for moisture and soiling resistance.

2.05 Pumps

A. Chilled water pumps shall have removable insulation to allow access to the pump without disruption of piping or electrical connections.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 23 09 00 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

23 09 00 Instrumentation & Control Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of this Section apply to Instrumentation and Control Work

specified in other 23 09 00 Series Specification Sections. C. The Instrumentation and Control Specifications, for convenience, are

divided into the following Sections which contain the requirements applicable to the systems named:

1. 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control 2. 23 09 01 - Controls 3. 23 09 33 - Electric/Electronic Controls 4. 23 09 43 - Pneumatic Controls 5. 23 09 13 - Control Systems 6. 23 09 03 - Building Management Control Systems 7. 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent of work includes furnishing and installing all necessary hardware, standard software, custom software, sensors, pneumatic tubing, pneumatic specialties, electrical wiring, electrical specialties, control relays, miscellaneous devices, engineering and shop drawings required for a complete and operational control system.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General:

1. In areas in which work is required within exiting facilities, Contractor shall familiarize itself with existing conditions prior to submitting bids. Field verify that connection points and portions of control systems being reutilized or extended are in accordance with desired configurations.

B. Installer's Qualifications:

1. Firms specializing and experienced in instrumentation and control system installations for not less than 5 years.

2. "Supplier", "Controls Supplier", "Vendor", or "Contractor shall mean

the contracting organization which has been assigned the work described in the instrumentation and control series specifications.



1.04 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Manufacturers other than those listed hereinafter may be submitted for consideration in accordance with requirements of Division 1 Section "Product Substitution Procedures".

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. A Two-Phase Submittal procedure is required. A Two-Phase submittal is defined as a submittal process which allows early authorization to proceed with project engineering, ordering of materials, and installation rough-in prior to submittal of detailed job specific documentation. Fabrication and installation shall not proceed until successful completion of Phase I and Phase II submittal reviews.

2. Submittal data called for under Phase I shall be forwarded to the

Owner's Representative within 30 days of award of Contract. Submittal data called for under Phase II shall be forwarded to the Owner's Representative within 90 days of award of Contract.

3. Data: Drawings, etc. shall be complete showing all plans, sections

and elevations of all equipment, complete details, characteristics, set points, initialization values, capacities, and general arrangement of the equipment floor plans showing all components, complete wiring and piping diagrams for the entire system.

B. Phase I:

1. Ten (10) copies of each of the following:

a) Communications network schematic showing

instrumentation and control system operator stations, field panels, and trunk cabling when applicable.

b) Instrumentation and control system configuration complete

with all peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, and interconnection diagrams.

c) Technical specification data sheets for each system

component and hardware device, including sensors and actuators.

d) Technical specification data sheets for all software modules

including operating system, energy management, High Level language compiler, Report Generation Language, each application package, colorgraphic generation, curve plotting, colorgraphic library symbols and diagrams, debug diagnostics, and test and verification software.



C. Phase II:

1. Phase II submittals shall include all job specific detailed information and requires providing engineering consultation with the Owner's Representative.

2. Data to be provided shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

a) Detailed data on system addressing including specific English language descriptor assignments for each area, building system and point to be accessed through the operator interface terminal.

b) Field Panel and connected data points for each including

input devices (sensors, etc.). c) Listings of assigned alarm and action taking messages for

each alarm point in the system. d) Detailed listing per field panel of input and outputs including

parameter assignments for each point such as analog range, analog limits, reasonableness values, default values, time delays, lockout, command and alarm priority, minimum on time, minimum off time, maximum off time, etc.

e) Complete listing of all application programs, points assigned

to each and assigned parameters such as comfort limits, kilowatt load values, kilowatt limit values, load shed sequence, demand strategies, occupancy time, adaptive parameters, default value, etc.

f) Detailed installation schedule listing key activities and

milestones, target dates, manpower assignments including names, titles, and phone numbers of project manager and other supervisory personnel.

1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 1 Section "Closeout

Procedures". B. In lieu of providing Record Drawing Transparencies for "As Built

Conditions", provide computer aided drawings (CAD) utilizing the latest version of AutoCAD. Deliver copy of finalized plot along with a copy of the computer file on magnetic media to the Owner.

C. Magnetic media shall be compatible with the Owner's system. Provide

copy of transmittal letter to the Architect, for its record, indicating that the above has been transmitted to the Owner.



D. Complete sketches of all system graphics including location of all dynamic data points, labels and color assignments for symbols, text, line diagrams and background color.

E. Provide complete system hardware documentation. Documentation shall

be provided in ten (10) sets. Documentation shall include:

1. "As Built Condition" of data specified under heading "Submittals" of this Section.

2. "As Built Condition" of interconnection wiring diagrams, or wire lists,

of the complete field installed system with complete, properly identified, ordering number of each system component and device.

F. Provide complete software documentation. Software documentation shall

consist of the following: 1. "As Built Condition" of data specified under heading "Submittals" of

this Section. 2. Data file logs of all programs entered and magnetic media copies of

all data files. 3. All points and logical group logs with all system points included in

the project. 4. All software manuals for the operating system, high level language

compiler, report generation language, application programs and plotting.

a) Complete Operator's Manual and System Definition Process

Manual, including a general description section for each, plus detailed step-by-step procedural sections for the various levels of operation and system definition, including graphics construction and generation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED SYSTEM SUPPLIERS

A. Instrumentation and Control:

1. Trane



2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The Instrumentation and Control System shall consist of direct digital control and data collection panels located in equipment spaces. These local control panels shall contain the necessary software and hardware to provide stand alone capability. The local control panels shall be connected to the central processor thru a data transmission network. The system shall include the capability of addressing remote off-site facilities thru automatic dial-up. From the central processor the operator shall be able to access the local control panels VIA menu driven selection process.

2.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. General:

1. Provide identification devices for all components supplied as part of this work.

2. Code component identification in accordance with designations

indicated on the drawings where available. If identification code is not indicated on the drawings develop an identification code and submit for approval.

B. Remote Mounted Devices: Provide, 1-1/2 inch square, 3/32 inch thick,

engraved plastic laminate component tags. Component identification shall have 1/4 inch high letters and shall be coded to identify device, and system. Tag shall have 5/32 inch diameter hole for fastener. Fastener shall be either solid brass chain or by solid brass S-hooks.

C. Panel Mounted Devices: Provide, minimum 1-1/2 inch square, 3/32 inch

thick, engraved plastic laminate signs for all components housed inside or mounted on the face of the control panel. Component identification shall have 1/4 inch high letters and shall be coded to identify device, and system. Sign shall be punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is required due to substrate. Mechanical fastening shall be by self-tapping stainless steel screws.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. All components shall be manufactured in accordance with current temperature control industry practices. Only top quality workmanship will be permitted.

B. All control devices, with the exception of unit mounted sensors, dampers

and valves shall be factory installed in control panels. The control panels shall be located in mechanical equipment rooms and be easily accessible. Panel location is subject to approval by the Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Install all components in accordance with manufacturer's published directions and recommendations.

3.02 WIRING

A. Provide all required low voltage wiring for the temperature control system. Power shall be extended from the building electrical distribution panels. Coordinate and update the electrical panel schedule upon project completion.

B. Also provide all required appliance branch circuit power wiring to the

temperature control panels. All electrical work shall be in full compliance with Division 26 00 00.

3.03 WORK WITHIN AN EXISTING FACILITY

A. During the installation phase uninterrupted normal use of the existing facilities must be maintained during the time required to perform the installation of the control system. It is mandatory that the buildings and systems be maintained in service.

B. Investigate the existing conditions and incorporate means of minimizing

down time into the installation. 3.04 SETTING DRAWINGS AND TEMPLATES

A. Provide all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installing work and for the purpose of making adjoining work conform. Furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required. Templates, setting plans etc., shall be furnished in time to meet all construction schedules.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 23 09 01- CONTROLS

23 09 01 Controls Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 – PRODUCTS 1.01 APPROVED SYSTEM SUPPLIERS

A. Instrumentation and Control:

1. Trane 1.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The Instrumentation and Control System shall consist of direct digital control and data collection panels located in equipment spaces. These local control panels shall contain the necessary software and hardware to provide stand alone capability. The local control panels shall be connected to the central processor thru a data transmission network. The system shall include the capability of addressing remote off-site facilities thru automatic dial-up. From the central processor the operator shall be able to access the local control panels VIA menu driven selection process.

1.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. General:

1. Provide identification devices for all components supplied as part of this work.

2. Code component identification in accordance with designations

indicated on the drawings where available. If identification code is not indicated on the drawings develop an identification code and submit for approval.

B. Remote Mounted Devices: Provide, 1-1/2 inch square, 3/32 inch thick,

engraved plastic laminate component tags. Component identification shall have 1/4 inch high letters and shall be coded to identify device, and system. Tag shall have 5/32 inch diameter hole for fastener. Fastener shall be either solid brass chain or by solid brass S-hooks.

C. Panel Mounted Devices: Provide, minimum 1-1/2 inch square, 3/32 inch

thick, engraved plastic laminate signs for all components housed inside or mounted on the face of the control panel. Component identification shall have 1/4 inch high letters and shall be coded to identify device, and system. Sign shall be punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is required due to substrate. Mechanical fastening shall be by self-tapping stainless steel screws.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS 23 09 01- CONTROLS

23 09 01 Controls Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

1.04 FABRICATION

A. All components shall be manufactured in accordance with current temperature control industry practices. Only top quality workmanship will be permitted.

B. All control devices, with the exception of unit mounted sensors, dampers

and valves shall be factory installed in control panels. The control panels shall be located in mechanical equipment rooms and be easily accessible. Panel location is subject to approval by the Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer.


SECTION 23 09 02 – BUILDING SYSTEM CONTROLS

23 09 02 – Building System Controls Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 8

PART 1 - PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Trane. 1.01 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS

A. General: Direct Digital Controller (DDC) panels shall be microprocessor based multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.

B. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own

operating system and databases including:

1. Control processes 2. Integral Programmable Time Clock 3. Alarm Management 4. Historical/Trend Data for all points 5. Maintenance Support Applications 6. Custom Processes 7. Operator I/O 8. Dial-Up Communications 9. Manual Override Monitoring

C. Point Types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point

inputs and outputs:

1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts 2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control 3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow and position

measurements. 4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity

control of primary equipment. 5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring.

D. Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two

RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals.

E Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the

operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.




F. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or

position of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.

G. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status

indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.

H. Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously

perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.

I. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network

terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980.

J. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be

an orderly shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 48 hours.

K. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically

resume full operation without manual intervention. L. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel shall

automatically receive a download via the local area network, phone lines, or connected computer. In addition, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS-485 port, or via telephone line dial-in.

M. Environmental Conditions:

1. The controller shall be capable of operation within the following limits:

a) Temperature - 32 to 120 degF b) Humidity - 0 to 95% RH

2. The controller shall withstand storage conditions within the following

limits:

a) Temperature - -4 to 176 degF b) Humidity - 0 to 95% RH




3. The controller shall be immune to electromagnetic interference from

radiated noises. i.e.: Walkie-Talkies, Variable Speed Motor Controllers, etc.

N. Electrical Power Requirements:

1. Provide power supplies with transient line surge protection and

noise filters.

1.02 DDC SOFTWARE FEATURES

A. General:

1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided.

2 The software programs specified in this section shall be provided

as an integral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.

B. Control Software Description:

1. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the

ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms.

a) Two Position Control. b) Proportional Control c) Proportional Plus Integral Control. d) Proportional, Integral, Plus Derivative Control. e) Automatic Control Loop Tuning.

2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a

provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.

3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The DDC panel shall provide protection

against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.

4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the

DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.

1.03 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS - HVAC APPLICATIONS

A. Each application specific controller (ASC) shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.




B. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating

system and data bases including:

1. Control Processes 2. Energy Management Applications (When applied to Building

Management System) 3. Operator I/O

C The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through

any network-resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network.

D Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the use of a portable

terminal. The capabilities of the portable terminal shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display setpoints 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog setpoints 7. Modification of gain and offset constants

E. Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control

algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.

F. Configuration and Download: The ASCs shall have the capability of

receiving configuration and program loading by both of the following: 1) locally, via a direct connect portable laptop service tool, 2) over the network, from the portable laptop service tool, and; 3) from the Operator Workstation, via the communication networks.

G Application Descriptions:

1. Unitary Controllers:

a) Unitary Controllers (direct digital controllers; i.e.-DDC) shall

support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems to address specific applications described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

i. Unit Vents (ASHRAE Cycle I, II, III, or W) ii. Heat Pumps (Air-to-Air, Water-to-Air) iii. Packaged Rooftops iv. Fan Coils (Two-Pipe, Four-Pipe)




b) Unitary Controllers shall support the following types of point

inputs and outputs:

i. Economizer Switch Over Inputs ii. Dry bulb iii. Outdoor Air Enthalpy iv. Differential Temperature v. Binary Input from a separate controller vi. Economizer Outputs vii. Integrated Analog with minimum position viii. Binary output to enable self-contained economizer

actuator ix. Heating and Cooling Outputs x. 1 to 3 Stages xi. Analog Output with two-pipe logic xii. Reversing valve logic for Heat Pumps xiii. Fan Output xiv. On/Off Logic Control xv. The clock; integral or remotely connected.

c) Unitary controllers shall support the following library of control strategies to address the requirements of the sequences described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

i. Daily/Weekly Schedules ii. Comfort/Occupancy Mode iii. Economy Mode iv. Standby Mode/Economizer Available v. Unoccupied/Economizer Not Available vi. Shutdown vii. Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode viii. Temporary Override Mode ix. Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Based

Control) x. Boost (Occupant Warmer/Cooler Control

d) Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each

Unitary Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.

e) Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each Unitary

Controller shall have the capability to automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.




f) Alarm Management: Each Unitary Controller shall perform

its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.

1.04 AHU CONTROLLERS

A. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

1. Large Air Handling Units

a) Mixed Air-Single Path

B. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to

perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. C. AHU Controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic

to perform the sequence of operation as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.

D. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall have

the capability to automatically and continuously, maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.

1. HVAC Application Specific Controller Configuration:

a) The Application Specific Controllers shall be preconfigured

for the application. Standard, Pre-tested, HVAC applications will be "built-in".

1.05 Building Automation Systems (BAS) Control Points Lists

A. Steam Boilers 1. Boiler steam pressure 2. System steam pressure 3. General fault 4. Chemical systems fault

B. Chilled Water AHU

1. Discharge Air Temp. SP and actual 2. Return Air Temp. 3. Outside Air (Global) 4. Outside Air Humidity (Global) 5. Discharge Humid 6. Return Humid. SP and Actual 7. Economizer Damper position OA/RA/MA




8. VFD Fault SA/RA 9. VFD Reference SA/RA (in HZ) 10. Humid. Valve position 11. CHW Temperature supply and return 12. CHW Valve position 13. Supply/Return Status SP and actual 14. Supply/Return CFM (Ebtron) 15. Ebtron OA CFM 16. Supply/Return Fan Status 17. High Limit for discharge humidifier 18. Freeze Stat Status 19. Heating Valve position 20. Heating water supply/return 21. HW pump status 22. Safeties status 23. Filter status Pre and Final 24. Mixed Air temperature

C. Chilled Water Chiller w/ Air Cooled Condenser

1. Chilled water supply and return actual and set point 2. Pump status. control versus status alarm 3. Compressor(s) fault 4. Condenser fan fault 5. OA enable temperature 6. General Fault 7. VFD status, reference HZ and output HZ 8. Sensor failure 9. Leak Detection 10. Suction/discharge pressure 11. Compressor run time hours

D. DX Air Handler 1. Discharge Air Temp. SP and actual 2. Return Air Temp. 3. Outside Air (Global) 4. Outside Air Humidity (Global) 5. Discharge Humid 6. Return Humid. SP and Actual 7. Economizer Damper position OA/RA/MA 8. VFD Fault SA/RA 9. VFD Reference SA/RA (in HZ) 10. Humid. Valve position 11. Supply/Return Status SP and actual 12. Supply/Return CFM (Ebtron) 13. Ebtron OA CFM 14. Supply/Return Fan Status




15. High Limit for discharge humidifier 16. Freeze Stat Status (if applicable) 17. Heating Valve position 18. Heating water supply/return 19. HW pump status 20. Safeties status 21. Filter status Pre and Final 22. Mixed Air temperature 23. Compressor status/fault 24. Condenser status/fault

E. Hot Water Boilers 1. Hot Water Supply and Return Actual and SP 2. Hot Water Pump VFD Status, Speed, and Fault 3. General Safeties Fault 4. Boiler Status/enable 5. System Schedule (for Temp.) 6. VFD status/fault 7. VFD speed reference and out in HZ 8. Radiation pump status and fault 9. Radiation supply and return temps 10. Schedule for reheat and radiation 11. Pump differential if system is primary secondary

F. Hot Water Heating Systems 1. Pump status, fault, status versus output 2. VFD speed versus reference 3. Supply and return temps 4. Heating schedule 5. Steam valve(s) output (signal)

G. Miscellaneous Points

1. Domestic Hot Water Temp. 2. Exhaust Fan Status and Control 3. Building Pressurization 4. Critical Room Temp monitors 5. Chiller for MRI/CT Status 6. Sump Pit Alarms 7. Communication Closets Cooling Unit Status 8. Medical Gas Master Alarm Panel Status 9. On VAV Boxes have a discharge air temp sensor


SECTION 23 09 03 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

23 09 03 Building Management Control System Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 15

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. The management system shall consist of the one or more of the following:

1. Stand alone DDC panels 2. Stand alone application specific controllers (ASCs) 3. Local Display Devices 4. Portable Operator's Terminals 5. Personal Computer Operator Workstations.

B. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both

capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator devices.

C. The system which includes software, PC's, and controllers shall be year

2000 compliant. The product shall manage dates and date calculations properly prior to, during, and after the calendar year 2000. This includes leap year calculations, date rollover, date-based logs, reports, and calculations.

D. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single

device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

E. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send

control commands and alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without dependence upon a central processing device, including a Central File Server. Standalone DDC panels shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations, terminals, and printers without dependence upon a central processing device or File Server.

1.02 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS

A. The design of the BMS shall network operator workstations and Standalone DDC Panels as shown on the system configuration drawing. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local area network, or auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of the two networking schemes.

B. Local Area Network:

1. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and DDC

panels shall directly reside on a local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis.




2. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment.

3. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware

configuration of the facility management system. The hardware configuration of the BMS network shall be transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs.

4. General Network Design: Network design shall include the

following provisions:

a) High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. The minimum baud rate shall be 19.2K baud.

b) Support of any combination of controllers and Operator

Workstations directly connected to the local area network. c) Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from

being lost. d) Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee

data integrity. e) Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data,

and ensure alarms are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond.

f) Commonly available, multiple source, networking

components shall be used to allow the BMS to coexist with other networking applications.

g) Automatic synchronization of the real-time clocks in all DDC

panels shall be provided.

C. Dial-Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow standalone DDC panels to communicate with remote operator devices on an intermittent basis via telephone lines.

1. Dial-Up Standalone DDC Panels: Auto-Dial panels shall

automatically place calls to workstations to report critical alarms, or to upload trend and historical information for archiving.




a) Standalone DDC Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms.

b) The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling

busy signals, "no-answers," and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices.

2. Dial-Up Workstations: Operators at dial-up workstations shall be

able to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all database generation and modification functions as described for workstations connected via the local area network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and either file or display information sent from remote DDC panels.

a) An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by

selection of any facility by its logical name. The PC Dial-Up program shall maintain a user-definable cross-reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers.

b) A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a

local area network, as well as a dial-up workstation for multiple auto-dial DDC panels or networks. Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local area network activity, nor shall local area network activity keep the workstation from handling incoming calls.

3. Modem Characteristics: Dial-up communications shall make use of

Hayes compatible 14.4 K baud modems or faster and voice grade telephone lines. Each standalone DDC panel may have its own modem, or a group of Standalone DDC panels may share a modem.

1.03 STAND ALONE DDC PANELS

A. See Specification Section 15955. 1.04 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES

A. General:

1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided.

2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided

as an integral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.




B. Control Software Description:

1. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the

ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:

a) Two Position Control b) Proportional Control c) Proportional plus Integral Control d) Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control e) Automatic Control Loop Tuning

2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a

provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.

3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection

against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.

4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the

DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.

C. Energy Management Applications: DDC Panels shall have the ability to

perform any or all of the following energy management routines:

1. Time of Day Scheduling 2. Calendar Based Scheduling 3. Holiday Scheduling 4. Temporary Schedule Overrides 5. Optimal Start 6. Optimal Stop 7. Night Setback Control 8. Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer) 9. Peak Demand Limiting 10. Fan Speed/CFM Control 11. Heating/Cooling Interlock 12. Cold Deck Reset 13. Hot Deck Reset 14. Hot Water Reset 15. Chilled Water Reset 16. Condenser Water Reset 17. Chiller Sequencing

D. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator

intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification.




E. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.

1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the

following in a custom process:

a) Any system-measured point data or status b) Any calculated data c) Any results from other processes d) User-Defined Constants e) Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exponential, etc.) f) Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) g) On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers

2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:

a) Time interval b) Time of day c) Date d) Other processes e) Time programming f) Events (e.g., point alarms)

3. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.

4. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to

generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer.

5. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming

feature shall be self-documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors.

F. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor,

buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network.




1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.

2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system

reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.

3. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point

changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date.

4. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed

to a user-defined list of operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line.

5. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time

and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.

6. Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing a library of

at least 250 Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel.

7. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical

alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.

8. Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall

be automatically logged to disk in Personal Computer industry standard database format. Operator commands initiated from Direct-connected workstations, dial-up workstations, and local DDC panel Network Terminal devices shall all be logged to this transaction file. This data shall be available at the Operator Workstation. Facility shall be provided to allow the user to search the transaction file using standard database query techniques, including searching by dates, operator name, data point name, etc. In addition, this transaction file shall be accessible with standard third party database and spreadsheet packages.

G. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection

utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways:




1. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store

Point History Files for all analog and binary inputs and outputs. 2. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically

sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point.

3. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog

and binary data shall also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours shall be provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.

4. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the

Standalone DDC panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file format compatible with Third Party personal computer applications.

H. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically

accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.

1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one

minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime

Totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

I. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically

sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analog and binary pulse input-type points.

1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations

of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.). 2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one

minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique,

user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.




J. Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.

1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records

associated with a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique,

user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.

1.05 INTEGRATION WITH THIRD-PARTY MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT

A. General:

1. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be capable of interoperating with multiple building systems supplied by different manufacturers. The BMS shall be able to receive, react to, and return information from multiple building systems.

2. Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-

time interoperability with BMS software features such as: Control Software, Energy Management, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data and Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Dial-Up and Local Area Network Communications, as described earlier in the specification.

B. Networking/Communications:

1. The BMS shall support any combination of third-party controllers (if

more than one third-party manufacturer is being integrated) on a single network.

2. A minimum of 10 third-party controllers shall be supported on a

single network. 3. Integration shall be by RS-232 or RS-485 technologies.

C. Diagnostics/Verification:

1. The installer/operator shall have the ability to ability verify, and

diagnose communication messages and point information between third-party controllers and the Building Management System.

D. Point Inputs and Outputs:

1. The BMS shall be able to monitor and control (change setpoints

with no reprogramming capabilities) the following third-party controller point inputs and outputs.




1.06 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Basic Interface Description:

1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software.

2. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style

keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu selection. For example, users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device.

3. Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the user,

Operator Workstations shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices.

4. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall provide

the ability to simultaneously view several different types of system displays in a windowing environment to speed facility operation and analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while displaying the trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user to analyze system performance. If the interface is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the BMS contractor shall provide at least one operator station.

a) Password Protection: Multiple-level password access

protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password.

b) Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator

devices, including DDC panel portable or panel-mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually.

c) A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported: d) A minimum of 20 passwords shall be supported at each

DDC panel.




e) Operators will be able to perform only those commands

available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

f) User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60

minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.

5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the

operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

a) Start-up or shutdown selected equipment b) Adjust setpoints c) Add/Modify/Delete time programming d) Enable/Disable process execution e) Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point f) Enable/Disable Totalization for each point g) Enable/Disable Trending for each point h) Override PID Loop setpoints i) Enter temporary override schedules j) Define Holiday Schedules k) Change time/date l) Enter/Modify analog alarm limits m) Enter/Modify analog warning limits n) View limits o) Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter p) Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load

6. Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or

manually, and directed to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:

a) A general listing of all points in the network b) List all points currently in alarm c) List of all off-line points d) List all points currently in override status e) List of all disabled points f) List all points currently locked out g) List of all items defined in a "Follow-Up" file h) List all Weekly Schedules i) List all Holiday Programming j) List of Limits and Deadbands k) Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical

point group, for a user-selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information.




7. Third Party Interface System data, including transactions, alarms,

totalization files, etc., shall be stored on the workstation disk drive in an industry standard database format (e.g., dBase IV) such that it is compatible with off the shelf third party database and spreadsheet programs.

B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and

system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Point List of this specification.

1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow

users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands.

2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity

values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.

3. Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator

Workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be

provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.

a) The BMS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered

screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.

b) The graphic development package shall use a mouse or

similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:

i. Define symbols ii. Position and size symbols iii. Define background screens iv. Define connecting lines and curves v. Locate, orient and size descriptive text vi. Define and display colors for all elements vii. Establish correlation between symbols or text and

associated system points or other displays.

C. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by




the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.

1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and

documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:

a) Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels b) Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations c) Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers d) Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated

point parameters, and tuning constants e) Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point f) Add/Delete/Modify control loops g) Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications h) Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based programming i) Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point j) Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point k) Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes l) Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols,

and cross-references to point data m) Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition n) Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords o) Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages

2. Programming Description: Definition of operator device

characteristics, DDC panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the-blank templates and graphical programming approach.

a) Graphical programming shall allow the user to define the

software configuration of DDC control logic for HVAC system control sequences, fan interlocks, pump interlocks, PID control loops, and other control relationships through the creation of graphical logic flow diagrams.

b) Graphical Programming: Control sequences are created by

using a mouse input device to draw interconnecting lines between symbols depicting inputs, operators (comparisons and mathematical calculations), and outputs of a control sequence. As a minimum, graphic symbols shall be used to represent:

i. Process Inputs, such as temperature, humidity, or

pressure values, status, time, date, or any other measured or calculated system data.

ii. Mathematical Process Operators, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or greater than, equal to, less than, etc.

iii. Logical Process Operators such as AND, OR, Exclusive OR, NOT, etc.

iv. Time Delays




v. Process Control Outputs such start/stop control points, analog adjust points, etc.

vi. Process Calculation Outputs vii. Text file Outputs and Advisories

3. Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any and all other DDC panels to allow the development of network-wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of other processes (cascading).

a) Sequence Testing and Simulation: A software tool shall be

provided, which allows a user to simulate control sequence execution and test strategies before they are actually applied to mechanical systems. Users shall be able to enter hypothetical input data, and verify desired control response and calculation results via graphical displays and hardcopy printouts.

4. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of

system definition shall be self-documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future.

5. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone

DDC panel databases shall be stored in at least one Operator Workstation.

6. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases

shall be provided. In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the system shall automatically download a new copy of the respective data base to restore proper operation. Data base back-up/Download shall occur over the local area network without operator intervention. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of any or all portions of a DDC panels data base.

D. Personal Computer Operator Workstation Description: (Provide (1))

1. Personal Computer Operator Workstations shall be provided for

command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the Standalone DDC panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.

a) Workstations shall be general purpose, commercially

available, personal computers with minimum 64 meg ram and 8 gig hard drive to perform all functions described in this specification.




b) Sufficient hard disk storage minimum 8 gig shall be provided to accommodate all fully configured point data bases, all application databases, all graphics data bases, all user-defined reports, and all historical data archival as described in this specification.

c) The display provided for system operation shall have a

diagonal screen measurement of no less than 17," and a minimum display resolution of no less than 640 x 480 pixels. Separate controls shall be provided contrast and brightness. The screen shall be non-reflective.

E. Laptop PC Workstation Description: (Provide (1))

1. Laptop Personal Computer Operator Workstations shall be

provided for command entry, alarm management, information management, and data base management functions. Laptop PCs may be directly connected to Standalone DDC panels on a temporary basis. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the Standalone DDC panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.

a) Laptop PC Operator Workstations shall be general purpose,

commercially available, personal computers with sufficient memory and processor capacity to perform all functions described in this specification, and as stated for the desktop system.

b) The Laptop display shall have a diagonal screen

measurement of no less than 9," and a minimum display resolution of no less than 640 x 480 pixels. The screen shall be non-reflective.

F. Standalone DDC panel Local or Portable Operator's Terminals: Each

DDC panel shall be capable of supporting an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data display, and program additions and modifications.

1. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a

minimum of 6 points with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems.




2. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a) Start and Stop Points b) Modify Setpoints c) Modify PID Loop Setpoints d) Override PID Control e) Change Time/Date f) Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling g) Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling h) Enter Temporary Override Schedules i) Define Holiday Schedules j) View Analog Limits k) Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits l) Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits m) Enter/Modify Analog Differentials n) View Point History Files

3. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real

or calculated points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This capability shall not be restricted to a set of predefined "global points," but shall provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC panel in the network.

4. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall be

identical to each other, as well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password changes shall automatically be downloaded to all DDC controllers on the network.

5. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language

prompting to eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the types of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.

6. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals

and tutorials shall be provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently displayed menus.

` 7. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for

all network devices. The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points at the DDC panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look-up tables.

8. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel Operator's

Terminal shall allow a user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall provide a record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30-minute intervals, or a record of the last ten status changes for binary type points.


SECTION 23 09 13 - CONTROL SYSTEMS

23 09 13 Control System Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4


A. General: To the extent possible all control valves, dampers and actuators shall be of the same manufacturer.

B. Globe, Butterfly and Ball Type Control Valves:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements provide control valves of one of the following: a) Keystone b) Johnson Controls

1.02 GLOBE TYPE CONTROL VALVES

A. 1/2" to 2" Single Seated: ANSI B16.15 class 250, cast brass body, brass

plug, cast brass cage and stainless steel stem. 1. Removable cage trim with provisions for guiding plug through travel

range. 2. Tight shut off, replaceable composition disk. 3. Synthetic elastomer packing. 4. Threaded ends. 5. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast

aluminum housing, synthetic rubber diaphragm and positioner.

B. 1/2" to 2" Single Seated: ANSI B16.15 class 150, cast brass body, brass plug and stainless steel stem. 1. Tight shut off, replaceable composition disk. 2. Threaded ends. 3. Teflon packing. 4. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast


C. 1/2" to 2" Single Seated: ANSI B16.15 class 150, cast brass body, stainless steel plug and stainless steel stem. 1. Threaded ends. 2. Teflon packing. 3. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast


D. 2 1/2" to 8" Single Seated: ANSI B16.15 class 250, cast iron body, stainless steel plug, stainless steel cage and stainless steel stem. 1. Removable cage trim with provisions for guiding plug through travel

range. 2. Tight shut off, TFE disk. 3. Teflon packing. 4. Flanged ends. 5. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast





E. 2 1/2" to 6" Single Seated: Cast iron body, brass plug and stainless steel stem. 1. Replaceable brass seat. 2. Tight-shut off composition disk. 3. Flanged ends. 4. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast

aluminum housing, synthetic rubber diaphragm and positioner. 5. 2 1/2" to 4" Single Seated: ANSI B16.15 Class 250, cast iron body,

stainless steel plug and stainless steel stem. 6. Replaceable stainless seat ring. 7. Flanged ends. 8. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast


F. 1/2" to 2" Mixing: ANSI B16.15 Class 250, cast brass body, brass plug, cast brass cage and stainless steel stem. 1. Removable cage trim with provisions for guiding plug through travel

range. 2. Tight shut off, replaceable composition disk. 3. Normally open inlet port on the valve body bottom. 4. Threaded ends. 5. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast

aluminum and iron housing, synthetic rubber diaphragm and positioner.

G. 1/2" to 2" Mixing: ANSI B16.15 Class 125, cast brass body, brass plug

and stainless steel stem. 1. Non - replaceable brass seats. 2. Normally open inlet port on the valve body bottom. 3. Threaded ends. 4. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast


H. 2 1/2" to 6" Mixing: ANSI B16.15 Class 125, cast iron body, stainless steel

plug, stainless steel cage and stainless steel stem. 1. Replaceable seats. 2. Normally open inlet port on the valve body bottom. 3. Flanged ends. 4. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast


I. 2 1/2" to 6" Mixing: ANSI B16.15 Class 125, cast iron body, brass plug

and stainless steel stem. 1. Replaceable brass seats. 2. Normally open inlet port on the valve body bottom. 3. Flanged ends. 4. Actuator: Removable, electric/electronic or pneumatic, die-cast





1.03 BUTTERFLY TYPE CONTROL VALVES

A. 2" TO 20" Resilient Seated: Lugged cast iron body, EDPM replaceable resilient seat, stainless steel stem, EDPM coated disc, and bronze bushing. Valves 12 inch diameter and less shall be suitable for pressures up to 100 psig at 250 deg. F. Valves 14 inch diameter and larger shall be suitable for pressures up to 75 psig at 250 deg. F. 1. Actuator: Spring opposed diaphragm type, iron housing, neoprene

diaphragm, adjustable travel stops, visual position indicators, and direct actuating positioner. Actuator shall fail to either normally open or normally closed as indicated.

B. 2" TO 20" Resilient Seated: Lugged cast iron body, EDPM replaceable

resilient seat, stainless steel stem, aluminum bronze disc and bronze bushing. Valves 12 inch diameter and less shall be suitable for pressures up to 100 psig at 250 deg. F. Valves 14 inch diameter and larger shall be suitable for pressures up to 75 psig at 250 deg. F. Assembly shall be provided with two valves and interconnecting linkage mounted on an ANSI 150 tee in either tandem or cross arrangement, as indicated on the drawings. 1. Actuator: Double acting single cylinder, stainless steel piston rods,

aluminum heads, chrome plated steel cylinder, galvanized tie rods, plated steel clevis, double acting pneumatic positioner with gauges.

1.04 BALL TYPE CONTROL VALVES

A. 1/4" TO 2": Bolted two piece brass body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seat and seals, carbon steel washers and stem nut and ASTM A 449 body bolts. 1. Actuator: Spring opposed diaphragm type, iron housing, neoprene

diaphragm, adjustable travel stops, visual position indicators, and direct actuating positioner. Actuator shall fail to either normally open or normally closed as indicated.

1.05 POWER OPERATED DAMPERS

A. Multi-blade type, with parallel blades for two position service and opposed blade design for modulating service. Provide interconnecting linkage between two damper assemblies which are operated by a single damper operator.

B. Provide blades with nonferrous pivot pins or nonferrous-sleeved pivot

pins, and flanged brass sleeve or 1/8 inch wall flanged steel sleeve, with flanged oil-impregnated oilite bushing or graphite impregnated nylon bushing. Provide brass washers between damper blades and oilite bushing flange. Linkages shall be provided with machined nonferrous moving contact surfaces with provisions for oiling. All other linkage connections shall be rigid.

C. Provide blade edges and ends with seals for quiet operation and tight

closure. Maximum seal leakage for outside air dampers shall be 1% at 1" WG when fully closed. Calk frames into ductwork to prevent bypass leakage.




D. Provide dampers with either a baked enamel finish, a zinc-rich paint finish,

or galvanized. Nonferrous surfaces shall not be painted. Frames may be galvanized instead of painted, however, outside air exhaust and return damper frames shall be galvanized after fabrication.

E. Dampers exposed to outdoor air conditions shall be pre-insulated type. F. Manufacturers:

1. Johnson Controls 2. Ruskin

1.06 VALVE AND DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electric motor actuators shall be split-phase type with oil-immersed gear train. Motor shall have ample torque capacity to handle applied loads under operating conditions normal to the system. Actuators in outdoor locations or those locations where temperature falls below minimum rated temperature of actuator shall be provided with heat.

B. Pneumatic and electric motor actuators shall be capable of providing

smooth proportioning control under operating conditions normal to the system. Provide spring return operators for "two position" control, unless otherwise indicated. Provide reversible operators for modulating control on electric operators. Provide spring returns on reversible operators where required for fail-safe operation.

C. Equip dampers with actuators sufficient power to control dampers without

flutter or hunting through the entire operating range at air velocities at least 20% greater than maximum velocity encountered in design operation. Damper actuators rated torque shall be 200% of the torque required to operate the dampers. Furnish operators with sufficient power on close off providing a tight seal against a differential pressure equal to the pump shut-off head for valves, or scheduled fan static pressure for dampers.

D. Provide positioners where two or more actuators are controlled from the

same controller and where indicated. Positioners shall be mounted directly on the driven device. Feedback from the stem or rod shall be through a pilot spring. Starting point shall be adjustable from 2 to 12 psi. Operating span shall be adjustable from 5 to 13 psi.

E. Actuators operating in sequence with other operators shall have

adjustable operating ranges and set points. Actuators shall have sufficient power on close off to provide tight sealing against maximum pressure encountered in system. Actuators shall cause operating device to fail to position indicated.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Johnson Controls Co.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 09 13.33 - VALVES

23 09 13.33 Valves Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 9

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY COMMENTS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all valves 2” and smaller for shut-off and bypass service shall be ball valves.

B. Valves for balancing operations shall not be ball or butterfly. C. All end connections shall be the same as is used for fittings for 2" and

below. Two and one half inches (2-1/2") and above, valves shall be flanged. Solder joints acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper ball valves.

D. Unless otherwise directed for valve applications, steam and

condensate pressure ranges are defined below:

1. Low Pressure----15 psig maximum 2. High Pressure---16-125 psig

E. All valves shall be labeled with 1-1/2" (one and one half inch) brass

tags bearing a letter to indicate the service and a number to indicate the valve. A permanent valve chart and system schematic diagram shall show the location of all valves.

F. A manufacturer's valve tag shall be on all valves identifying the valve

type and major component materials. G. Install valves after welding adjacent to valve is complete to protect seat

and disk. H. Insulated valves shall have extended handle stems. I. All valves for all services shall be fully bi-directional and suitable for

dead end service. J. On all valves the packing compression is to be independent of the

stem, ball or handle systems. All valve stems are to be blowout proof. Packing shall be accessible without disturbing the insulation.

K. All valves used for vent or drain service on water systems shall have a

brass hose connection with cap and chain. L. Isolation vales are required at all mains /branches to each floor.



PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 BALL VALVES

A. For all water services, low pressure steam, low pressure condensate and all other normal non-corrosive services, ball valves shall be:

1. Body Bronze 2. Body Style Full Port 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with

stem extension to raise handle out of insulation

4. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled

double seal 5. Seat Working 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum P/T Rating 6. Body Working 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum P/T Rating 7. WOG Rating 600 psig Minimum 8. Saturated Steam 150 psig Minimum Rating 9. Stem Blow out proof with packaging nut

B. For high pressure steam service ball valves shall be:

1. Body Carbon or 316 Stainless Steel 2. Body Style Standard Port, butt or socket weld

connection 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with

stem extension, if required, to raise handle out of insulation.

4. Seat High Temperature RTFE, double seal 5. Seat Working 100 psig @ 450°F Minimum P/T Rating



6. Body Working 750 psig @ 100°F Minimum P/T Rating 7. WOG Rating 400 psig Minimum 8. Steam Rating 100 psig @ 450°F Minimum

C. For special applications, obtain approval of Planning, Design and

Construction. D. Minimum Flow Coefficients (Cv):

Size CV 1/2" 8 3/4" 14 1" 35 1-1/4" 46 1-1/2" 75 2" 105 2-1/2" 300 3" 390 4" 680

2.02 GAUGE VALVES A. Provide needle valves for shut-off on all pressure gauges at the gauge

and separate 1/2" (one half inch) ball valves for the various taps to the gauge on a manifolded gauge.

2.03 CHECK VALVES

A. Two inches (2") and under: 45° swing check, screwed end.

B. Two and one half inches (2 1/2") and over: Non-slam type globe style lift check, non-slam type tilting disc or wafer body non-slam type lift check. Double disc or bi-folding disc type valves are not acceptable.

2.04 AIR VENT VALVES

A. On chilled water and glycol service use manual vents only. Do not use automatic vent valves.



2.05 Acceptable Manufacturers:

A. Gate Valve:

1. Grinnell Corporation. 6020 A 2. Hammond Valve Corporation IRI 140. 3. NIBCO Inc. F-6170 4. 2” and smaller – MSS SP-80 5. 2”1/2 and Larger – MSS SP-70 6. Milwakee

B. Ball Valves:

1. Full port, bronze with stainless steel ball – all sizes 2. Apollo Division. 70-11-, Apollo88 3. Grinnell Corporation. Model 3700-6 4. Hammond Valve Corporation Mode;8614 5. MSS-SP-110 w/S.S.ball 6. Nibco

C. Globe Valves:

1. Hammond Valve Corporation. IB14 2. Nibco Inc. T-276-AD

D. Calibrated Balancing Valves

1. Mepco. 2. Tour and Anderson. 3. High Pressure Steam and Condensate, class 250 and 300 4. High-pressure Steam and condensate Services (61psig-

200psig); ¼ thru 2” bronze globe valve, 300lb. MSP renewable stainless steel disc.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers

a) Grinnell Manufacturers b) Grinnell 3370 c) Hammond IB 949 d) Nibco T-473



6. 21/2’ thru 12” ;flanged gate valve, O.S.&Y. 250lb.WSP< iron body bronze trim.

7. Acceptable manufacturers:

a) Grinnell 6100A b) Hammond I.R. 330 c) Nibco F669

8. Check Valve: Check valve shall be the bolted cover design 9. Trim : Disc seating shall be 13 CR faced; Seat shall be Stellite 6

faced. Disc shaft shall not penetrate the body and all parts shall be accessible from the top.

10. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Grinnell 3370 b) Hammond IB 949 c) Nibco T-47

2.06 VALVE APPLICATION

A. General

1. Provide rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stem, except as follows:

a) Non rising stem valve may be only where there in

insufficient clearance to properly operate the valve

B. Refer to the piping section for specific valve duty application. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, Ball, or Globe Valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, non-slam. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP rating are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.



C. Chilled Water Piping: Use the following types of valves

1. Angle valve NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, Class 150, bronze. 2. Ball Valves NPS3 inch and smaller: Two piece, 600 psig CWP

rating, bronze. 3. Ball Valve NPS 4 inch through 8 inch: Class 150, carbon steel. 4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, 150

bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves: NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger : Type 1, Class

125, Cast Iron. 6. Gate Valve, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger; Type 1,Class 125,

OS&Y, bronze- mounted cast iron. 7. Globe Valves, NPS2 inch and smaller: Type 3. Class 150,

bronze. 8. Globe Valve NPS, 2-1/2 inch and larger: Type 1, Class 125,

bronze mounted cast iron.

D. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves.

1. Angle valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller: Type 3, Class 150, bronze.

2. Ball Valves, NPS 3 inch and smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP

rating, bronze. 3. Ball Valves, NPS 4 inch and larger: Class 150, carbon steel. 4. Swing Check Valve, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3 Class3,

150, bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger: Type 1, Class

125, cast. 6. Silent Double Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and larger; Dual-

plate, water- lug, Class 125, cast iron.



7. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 inch and larger: Type 1, class 125 OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron.

8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, Class150,

bronze. 9. Globe Valve, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Type, 1, Class 125

bronze- mounted cast iron.

E. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, Class 150, bronze.

2. Ball Valves NPS 3 inch and Smaller: Two Piece, 600- psig CWP

rating, bronze. 3. Ball Valves, NPS 4 inch through 8 inch: Class 150, carbon steel. 4. Swing Check Valve, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, class 150,

bronze. 5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger class 125, cast

iron. 6. Silent Double Disc Check Valves NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger:

Dual-Plate, water-lug, Class 125, cast iron. 7. Globe Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 2, Class 150,

bronze.

F. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following types of Valves

1. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller: Type 3, Class

1250, bronze. 2. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Type 1, Class

125, Cast iron. G. Low- Pressure Steam Piping: Use the following Valves:

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, Class 150,

bronze.



2. Swing Check Valves: NPS 2 inch and Smaller: Type 3, Class

150, Bronze. 3. Swing Check Valve: NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Type 2, Class

125, cast iron. 4. Globe Valves, NSP 2 inch and smaller: Type3, Class 300,

bronze. 5. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Type 1, Class 150,

bronze-mounted cast iron.

H. High Pressure Steam Piping: Use the following Types of Valves.

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller: Type 3, Class 300, bronze.

2. Swing Check valves, NSP 2inch and Smaller: Type 3, Class 300

bronze. 3. Swing Check valves, NPS 2-1/2and Larger: Type11, Class 250,

cast iron. 4. Globe Valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller; Type 3, Class 300,

bronze. 5. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Type1, Class 250,

bronze-mounted cast iron.

I. Steam Condensate Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller: Two piece 600 psig CWP rating, bronze.

2. Ball Valve, NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger: Class 150 carbon steel. 3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 inch and smaller Type3, Class 150,

bronze. 4. Swing check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger; Type3, Class

125, cast iron.



5. Globe Valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller; Type Class 150, bronze.

6. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger; Type1. Class 125

bronze-mounted cast iron. 2.07 VALVES END CONNECTIONS

A. Select valves, except water and flangeless type, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 inch and smaller. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flange ends. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 inch and larger: Flange ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 inch and Smaller: Treaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Victaulic. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 inch and Larger: Flanged ends.


SECTION 23 09 33 - ELECTRICS / ELECTRONICS CONTROLS

23 09 33 Electrics / Electronics Controls Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTATS

A. Integral manual On-Off/Auto selector switch type if indicated, maximum differential of 2 deg F, concealed temperature adjustment cover design as approved. Line voltage thermostats shall be rated for the load, single or two pole as required. Thermostat covers and finishes shall be manufacturer's standard with finish as selected by the Architect.

B. Provide insulating bases for thermostats located on exterior walls.

Thermostat guards in office areas shall be finished metal type. Thermostat guards in shop and maintenance areas shall be industrial duty cast metal or wire guard type. Guards and thermostats shall be mounted on separate bases.

C. Where indicated, provide thermostat with multi-stage heating and cooling.

Unit shall have a minimum of 3 deg F change over differential. D. Same as A except a sun shield is included.

1.02 ELECTRIC LOW LIMIT THERMOSTAT (FREEZESTAT)

A. Duct type, fixed 5 deg F differential, range 30 to 60 deg F. Sensing element shall be a 20 foot long capillary tube responding to the lowest temperature sensed along any 12 inches of bulb length. Switch shall be SPDT 120/240 volts AC, rated for 10 amps at 120 volts full load. Unit shall be manually reset. Provide one low limit thermostat for each 20 square feet or fraction thereof of coil surface area.

1.03 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SWITCHES

A. Unit to provide a contact closure on a pressure differential increase between two points. Element shall be suitable for the service. Set point shall be adjustable over the full range of the instrument. Electrical switch rating shall be SPDT, 10 amps at 110 volts AC. When located outdoors, units shall be suitable for outdoor service.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. United Electric Control Co. 2. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

1.04 WATER/GAS FLOW MONITOR

A. Thermal conductivity type flow monitor which senses the rate of flow of a liquid or gas and provides a switched output signal. Self-contained unit with adjustable set point, 304 SS wetted parts, -13E to 176EF sensor rating and 435 PSIG maximum pressure rating. Supply voltage shall be 120 VAC, 45 ma and SPST contact rating of 3 amps at 120 VAC. Response time of 1-10 seconds at 5.9 to 118 ft/min for fluids and gases.




B. Manufacturer: 1. Efector Inc.

1.05 WATER FLOW SWITCHES

A. UL Listed, suitable for all service application conditions. Body minimum working pressure rating shall equal or exceed service pressure. Switch electrical rating shall be 230 volts AC 3.7 ampere, 115 volts AC 7.4 ampere, and 125 VAC 115-230 VAC AC pilot duty. Unit shall have two SPDT switches. Actuating flow rate shall be field adjustable for the specified and indicated service. Switch location shall preclude exposure to turbulent or pulsating flow conditions. Flow switch shall not cause pressure drop exceeding 2 psi at maximum system flow rate.

1.06 ELECTRIC-PNEUMATIC RELAYS

A. Electric, solenoid-operated two position air valve for panel or wall mounting. Solenoid coil to be 120 VAC, 24 VAC or 12 VDC as required. Valve to be 3 or 4 port.

1.07 LIMIT SWITCHES

A. Oil-tight type with operator to provide required function. SPDT contacts rated at 10 amps continuous, 300 volts AC.

1.08 PRESSURE SWITCH

A. Switch shall close contact on pressure increase above set point. Element shall be suitable for service. Set point shall be adjustable over full range. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 amps at 120 VAC. Provide dual switches where indicated. Switches shall be isolated such that voltages of different levels and polarity may be accommodated without electrical interference.

1.09 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Temperature sensors shall be resistance type (RTD) with platinum or nickel element. No thermistors or thermocouple will be acceptable. Minimum RTD accuracy shall be +/-0.5 deg. F, end to end system accuracy shall be +/-1 degree F over the entire range. Range shall be appropriate to the application.

B. Room sensors shall have a tamperproof cover. The cover shall include

set point adjust potentiometer and occupancy push button as shown on the point list or drawings.

C. Duct temperature sensors shall be averaging type for mixed air and coil

discharge temperature sensing. Averaging RTD's shall be at least 16 feet long.

D. Single point duct mounted sensors shall have a rigid holder extending at

least 6 inches into the duct.




E. Liquid immersion sensors shall be installed in brass or stainless steel thermowells. Steam immersion sensors shall be installed in stainless steel thermowells. Thermowells shall be packed with thermally conductive compound prior to sensor installation. Thermowell pressure rating shall meet or exceed the system maximum pressure rating.

F. Outside air sensors shall be provided with a sunshield when mounted on

an outside wall as indicated in the point list. 1.10 HUMIDITY SENSORS

A. Relative humidity sensors shall be a thin film capacitive type element with 10% to 90% range end +/-3% accuracy through this range.

B. Duct mounted sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Wall

mounted sensors shall be provided with tamperproof covers.

1.11 DEWPOINT SENSORS

A. Dew point sensors shall measure dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures and provide automatic conversation from stored psychometric data from S.E.M.S.

1.12 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Differential pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of +/-1% of full scale. Full scale shall not exceed 150% of expected input. Safe overpressure shall be at least 5 times full scale. Sensors shall have adjustments for zero.

1.13 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW TRANSMITTERS

A. Differential pressure flow transmitters used for measuring flow rates shall provide a 4-20 mADC linear output signal, accuracy of +/-0.25% of calibrated span. Span and zero shall be field adjustable. Safe overpressure of transmitter shall meet or exceed the maximum system pressure. Provide 5-valve manifolds for each transmitter.

1.14 HIGH STATIC LIMIT

A. High static limit shall be a two-position four-wire electric type device and shall shut down fan upon activation. Limit shall require manual reset.

1.15 AQUASTATS

A. Aquastats shall be strap-on type for surface mounted in either the horizontal or vertical position.

1.16 CURRENT SENSORS

A. Current sensors shall consist of a donut type CT shall include a safety shunt.




1.17 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

A. Pressure transmitters shall accept a pressure input and provide a 4-20 Ma DC output with accuracy of +/-1.0% of full scale. Maximum response time shall be 1 second.

1.18 AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Provide where indicated airflow traverse stations capable of continuously monitoring the fan or duct capacities they serve. The station shall consist of airflow traverse probes mounted in a 14 gauge galvanized steel casing with 90 degree flanges. The traverse probes shall be interconnected by metal tubing.

B. Each airflow traverse probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure

sensors internally connected to their respective averaging manifolds. The airflow sensing probe shall not be affected by airflows containing directional flows with yaw or pitch up to 30 degrees. Probes shall be of aluminum.

C. The number of sensors on each probe and the number of probes utilized

at each installation shall comply with ASHRAE standards for duct traversing. The airflow station shall have an accuracy of +/-2 to 3% of actual flow.

D. Each flow station shall be provided with a linear output 4-20 mADC

transmitter mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure. E. The transmitter accuracy shall be +/-1/2% of full scale with automatic

zeroing. F. The transmitter accuracy shall be +/-1% of full scale with automatic

zeroing. G. The transmitter accuracy shall be +/-2 to 3% of full scale with automatic

zeroing. 1.19 ELECTROMAGNETIC WATER FLOW METERS (MAG METERS)

A. Mag meters shall be Teflon lined with stainless steel electrodes with integral grounding electrode. Ground rings or other external grounds shall not be acceptable. Meters larger than 2 inch shall be flanged. Meters shall be microprocessor-based with field programmable to span and output range. Output provided shall be 4-20 mADC analog signal for flow rate, accuracy shall be +/-1% of flow rate. A digital LED display indicating the flow rate shall be provided.




1.20 VORTEX SHEDDING FLOW METERS (VORTEX METERS)

A. Vortex meters for steam, gas or water shall be of the differentially switched capacitive type. All vortex meters provided on this project shall have common electronics and sensors for each of replacement. Sensors shall be replaceable without removing the meter from piping. Output provided shall be 4-20 mADC analog signal for flow rate, accuracy shall be +/-1% of flow rate. A digital LED display indicating the flow rate shall be provided.

B. Acceptable Suppliers/Installers:

1. Johnson Controls 2. Barber Coleman 3. Landis Staefa 4. Michigan Controls

1.21 FLOW METER/TRANSMITTER

A. Insertion (Hot Tap) type turbine flow meter designed to be installed / removed without depressurizing the pipe. The turbine rotor shall have jeweled bearing with a tungsten carbide shaft and 316 SS wetted parts and body. Service shall be compatible to liquids at 1.0 centistoke. The rotor output signal shall be through a pulse "hall-effect" sensor linearly proportional to the measured flow rate. A transmitter shall be included and shall be mounted in a cast aluminum, watertight housing on the meter. Include necessary mounting hardware and appropriately sized compression fitting for the "hot tap" installation. Performance shall be as follows: 1. Transmitter Output: 4-20 ma 2. Linearity: + 0.5%. 3. Repeatability: + 0.05%. 4. Flow Range: 0.2 - 30 FPS. 5. Maximum Temperature: 250 deg.F. 6. Pressure: 200 psig.

B. Manufacturers: 1. Seametrics: 115/215 Series 2. Flow Technology, Inc.: FT Series


SECTION 23 09 43 - PNEUMATIC CONTROLS

23 09 43 Pneumatic Controls Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION COPPER TUBING

1. Tubing (All Sizes): a) ASTM B 280 No. 122 Copper Tubing. Minimum wall thickness of

.025

2. Fittings: a) Solder Type; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

fittings of one of the following: i. Chase Brass Company ii. Nibco iii. Mueller Brass

3. Pipe Nipples:

a) Red Brass

4. Solder: a) ASTM B32 b) Tin Antimony c) Alloy Grade 95TA

1.02 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION PLASTIC TUBING

1. Tubing (All Sizes): a) Virgin Polyethylene; ASTM D 1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade 5,

meeting stress crack test per ASTM D 1693, and flame retardant. Multi-tube harness material shall be as specified with polyester film barrier and vinyl jacket, minimum thickness .062 inches.

2. Fittings:

a) Compression Type; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fittings of one of the following: i. Crawford "Swagelock KN" ii. Imperial-Eastman "Poly-Flo" iii. Parker-Hannifin "Poly-Tite"

1.03 AIR PRESSURE REDUCING STATIONS

A. Provide pressure reducing stations complete with: pressure reducing valve, one micron particulate filter with manual drain valve, valved by-pass, valved pressure indicator upstream and down stream, and regulated air pressure relief valve. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

relieving type pressure regulator of one of the following: a) Fisher Controls b) Norgen II Series c) Wilkerson R Series




2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

one micron particulate filter of one of the following: a) Deltech 510 Series b) Hankison 3100 Series c) Norgen F11 Series d) Wilkerson F Series Type B Element

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure relief valve of one of the following: a) Anderson Greenwood b) Consolidated c) Teledyne-Farris

1.04 INSTRUMENTATION ISOLATION VALVES

1. Valve Type: a) Gate or Globe; socket or butt welded on the system side and

threaded on the instrumentation side.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide instrumentation isolation valves of one of the following: a) Vogt b) Swagelock

1.05 PRESSURE GAUGE

A. Pressure gauge shall be Bourdon tube type, with 3-1/2-inch dial. Case shall be of drawn steel with friction fit stainless steel ring, body finished black. Dial shall be white coated metal with black figures and graduations. Bourdon tube and socket material be as required for the service. Movement shall be socket mounted, independent of case. Pointer shall be precision needle type. Range shall be as required and accuracy shall be within 2 percent over the middle third of the range.

B. Manufacturer:

1. Trerice 2. Marshalltown Mfg. Co. 3. U.S. Gage 4. Ashcroft 5. Johnson Controls

1.06 CONTROL AIR COMPRESSOR

A. Provide an oil-free air compressor. 1.07 REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER

A. Provide a refrigerated air dryer.




1.08 SPACE THERMOSTATS

A. Lock-shield type, less thermometer, horizontally mounted. Thermostats shall have an adjustable differential, direct or reverse acting single or dual settings as required, minimum setting no greater than 1-1/2°F over a temperature range of approximately 55°F to 85°F.

B. Provide insulating bases for thermostats located on exterior walls.

Thermostat guards shall be industrial duty cast metal. Mount guards and thermostats on separate bases. Mount thermostats 54 inches above finished floor.

C. Provide thermostat with visible or concealed thermometer, dual increment

deg F and deg C, and visible or concealed set point adjustment as indicated on drawings. 1. Johnson Controls T-4000 (Pneumatic) 2. TRANE (Electric) with DDC.

1.09 ELECTRIC-PNEUMATIC RELAYS

A. Electric, solenoid-operated two position air valve for panel or wall mounting. Solenoid coil to be 120 VAC, 24 VAC or 12 VDC as required. Valve to be 3 or 4 port.

1.10 PRESSURE SWITCH

A. Switch shall close contact on pressure increase above set point. Element shall be suitable for service. Set point shall be adjustable over full range. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 amps at 120 VAC. Provide dual switches where indicated. Switches shall be isolated such that voltages of different levels and polarity may be accommodated without electrical interference.

1.11 SELECTOR RELAY

A. Pneumatic, proportional, selecting type for receiving, two or more input signals and transmitting the highest or lowest signal as an output.

1.12 SWITCHING RELAY

A. Pneumatic, snap-acting switching type with adjustable setpoint and fixed differential for connecting a common port to either of two other ports.

1.13 INVERSE DERIVATIVE RELAY

A. Pneumatic inverse derivative relay, 3-15 psi input/3-15 psi output, 20 psi

supply derivative gain - 1:6, derivative time setting - standard 0.05 to 20 minutes. Steady state ratio 1:1. Response level 0.1% of full scale. Ambient temperature limits minus 40 to 180 deg F.




1.14 REVERSING RELAY

A. Pneumatic, proportional, reversing type to product an inversely proportional output signal.

1.15 BOOSTER RELAY

A. Pneumatic, proportional booster type for increasing the volume capacity of an input signal to a directly proportional output signal.

1.16 BIAS RELAY

A. Pneumatic, proportional to provide sequential operation of controlled

devices having similar spring ranges and operated by the same control signal.

1.17 RATIO RELAY

A. Pneumatic, proportional, ratio type for converting an input signal of a given span to a directly proportional pneumatic output signal. Adjustable start point and span.

1.18 AVERAGING RELAY

A. Pneumatic, proportional, averaging type for receiving two or more input signals and producing a single average output signal.

1.19 MINIMUM POSITIONING SWITCH

A. Pneumatic, proportional positioning type for surface or flush mounting on wall or panel as indicated with graduated scale plate 1 to 100%, output pressure indicator and an adjustable start point.

1.20 SWITCHES

A. Pneumatic, 1/8 inch IPS, two or three position as indicated, with indicating plates and suitable for panel mounting.

1.21 PILOT POSITIONERS

A. Positioner starting point shall be adjustable from 2 to 12 psi and operating span shall be adjustable from 5 to 13 psi. Feedback from the stem or rod shall be through a pilot spring. Positioner shall be furnished with gauges to indicate input pressure, supply pressure and output pressure. Linearity shall be plus or minus 0.1% of stem travel position.

1.22 I/P TRANSDUCER

A. Transducer shall accept a 4-20 Ma input and convert the signal to 3-15 psig output. Accuracy shall be +0.1% of output span.




1.23 AIR FLOW MEASURING ELEMENT

A. Permanently installed air flow measuring element shall provide a velocity-pressure output proportional to the air flow using multiple averaging total pressure and static pressure probes. Install elements where indicated per manufacturer's recommendations. Give consideration to minimize air flow disturbances or turbulence.

B. Coordinate air flow element spans at design flow rates and operating

differential pressures with the associated flow instruments and controls. C. Standard galvanized ductwork - provide aluminum/copper fabricated

element, complete with integral air flow sending straighteners. D. Approved Installers/Suppliers:

1. Trane

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 20 00- HVAC PUMPS

23 30 00 HVAC PUMPS Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 5


A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Inline Pumps:

a) "Series 1000", Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b) "Series 60 or 80", Bell & Gossett, ITT. c) "1600 Series", Taco, Inc.

2. Base-Mounted, Close-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:

a) "Series 2,000, Model 600", Allis-Chalmers Pump, Inc. b) “Series 1531", Bell & Gossett ITT. c) "Series C", Peerless Pump.

3. Base-Mounted Flexible-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps: a) "Series 2,000, Model 150", Allis-Chalmers Pump, Inc. b) "Series 1510", Bell & Gossett, ITT. c) "Series F", Peerless Pump.

4. Base-Mounted Flexible-Coupled, Double-Suction Pumps:

a) "Series 8,000, Models 100 and 150", Allis-Chalmers Pump, Inc.

b) "VSC & VSCS", Bell & Gossett, ITT b. "Series 5100, Type AD", Peerless Pump.

1.02 PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Pumps: Factory-assembled, factory-tested and painted with machinery enamel prior to shipment. Fabricate casings to allow removal and replacement of impellers without necessity of disconnecting piping. Type, sizes, and capacities shall be as indicated.

B. Preparation for Shipping: After assembly and testing, clean flanges and

exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with an anti-corrosion compound. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.

C. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. D. All design, construction, installation and performance features of

centrifugal pumps shall be suitable for the service requirements. E. All flexible couplings shall be center drop-out type. F. Pump impeller diameter shall be equal to or larger than the smallest

cataloged diameter for the casing and shall not exceed the largest cataloged diameter for the casing.



G. All pump casings and flanges shall be designed for the system working pressure and tested at 1-1/2 times this pressure. The working pressure is the sum of the total dynamic head and system static head.

H. Piping connections to the pumps shall not be supported by the pumps.

Provide floor flange base elbows supported from the pump foundations. I. At each pump, provide a suitable metal guard over the pump coupling. J. All pumps shall be provided with pressure tappings on the suction and

discharge sides of the casings. K. All pumps exposed to outdoor weather conditions shall be provided with

totally enclosed motors. L. For all pumps, provide a standard stamped nameplate securely mounted

to the base plate with information including: Pump manufacturer's, pump size and Class,l pump model number, pump serial number, head and capacity ratings. Also, provide for Owner's approval drawing submittals which will summarize in addition to the above, recommended grease lubricant, motor information including manufacturer's name, horsepower, motor frame, size, full load amperage ratings. Upon completion of equipment delivery, pump suppliers shall provide a complete and itemized parts materials list, cross sectional drawings, lubrication, operating and maintenance instructions.

1.03 INLINE PUMPS

A. General Description: Pumps shall be centrifugal, close-coupled, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design, rated for 175 psig working pressure and 225 deg F continuous water temperature.

B. Casings Construction: Class 30 cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at

inlet and outlet connections. C. Impeller Construction: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed,

overhung, single-suction, cast bronze, conforming to ASTM B 584, and keyed to shaft.

D. Wear Rings: Removable, bronze. E. Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Ground and polished steel shaft, with stainless

steel sleeve and integral thrust bearing. Provide slinger on motor shaft between motor and seals to prevent liquid that leaks past pump seals from entering the motor bearings.

F. Seals: Mechanical seals consisting of carbon steel rotating ring, stainless

steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket. G. Motor: Direct-mounted to pump casing; with lifting and supporting lugs in

top of motor enclosure.



1.04 BASE-MOUNTED, CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS

A. General Description: Pumps shall be base-mounted, centrifugal, close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design, and a rated for 175 psig working pressure and 225 deg. F. continuous water temperature.

B. Casings Construction: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, and

threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections. C. Impeller Construction: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed,

overhung, single-suction, fabricated from cast bronze conforming to ASTM B 584, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.

D. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze. E. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Steel shaft, with stainless steel sleeve.

Provide slinger on motor shaft between motor and seals to prevent liquid that leaks past pump seals from entering the motor bearings.

F. Seals: Mechanical seals consisting of flushed seals consisting of carbon

steel rotating ring, stainless steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.

G. Motor: Direct-mounted to the pump casing with supporting legs as an

integral part of motor enclosure. 1.05 BASE-MOUNTED, FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS

A. General Description: Pumps shall be base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case design, and rated for 175 psig working pressure and 225 deg. F continuous water temperature.

B. Casings Construction: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, and

threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections. C. Impeller Construction: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed,

overhung, single-suction, fabricated from cast bronze conforming to ASTM B 584, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.

D. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze. E. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Steel shaft, with stainless steel sleeve. F. Seals: Mechanical seals consisting of carbon steel rotating ring, stainless

steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket. G. Pump Couplings: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and

shaft misalignment; complete with metal coupling guard.



H. Separator: John Crane Kynar Model Abrasive Separator with all required piping for flushing seal faces. The unit shall be mounted on the pump assembly per factory instructions for removal of abrasive laden fluids and injection of clean fluids into the gland housings over each seal face to keep them free of contamination.

I. Mounting Frame: Factory-welded frame and cross members, fabricated of

steel channels and angles conforming to ASTM B 36. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupler guard, and motor. Grind welds smooth prior to application of factory finish. Motor mounting holes for field-installed motors shall be field-drilled.

J. Motor: Secured to mounting frame with adjustable alignment on mounting

frame. 1.06 BASE-MOUNTED, FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, DOUBLE-SUCTION PUMPS

A. General Description: Pumps shall be base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, double-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, axially split case design, and having an impeller mounted between bearings. Temperature and pressure ratings: 175 psig working pressure and 225 deg. F continuous water temperature.

B. General Description: Pumps shall be base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-

coupled, double-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, axially split case design, and having an impeller mounted between bearings. Temperature and pressure ratings: 175 psig working pressure and 250 deg F continuous water temperature.

C. Casings Construction: Cast iron, with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 flanged

piping connections, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections, and threaded drain plug at the bottom of the volute.

D. Casings Construction: Cast iron, with ANSI B16.1, Class 250 flanged

piping connections, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections, and threaded drain plug at the bottom of the volute.

E. Impeller Construction: Statically, and dynamically balanced, closed,

double-suction, fabricated from cast bronze conforming to ASTM B 584, keyed to shaft.

F. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze. G. Pumps Shaft: Steel. H. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in a cast

iron housing. I. Seals: Mechanical seals consisting of carbon steel rotating ring, stainless

steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.



J. Pump Couplings: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment; complete with metal coupling guard.

K. Separator: John Crane Kynar Model Abrasive separator with all required

piping for flushing seal faces. The unit shall be mounted on the pump assembly per factory instructions for removal of abrasive laden fluids and injection of clean fluids into the gland housing over each seal face to keep them free of contamination.

L. Mounting Frame: Factory-welded frame and cross members, fabricated of

steel channels and angles conforming to ASTM B 36. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupler guard, and motor. Grind welds smooth prior to application of factory finish. Motor Mounting holes for field-installed motors shall be field-drilled.

M. Motor: Flexible-coupled to pump, with adjustable alignment on mounting

frame.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING

23 21 13 Hydronic Piping Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 9


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydronic piping system products from one of the following:

1. Grooved Mechanical Joint Pipe, Fittings, and Couplings:

a) Victaulic Company of America b) Grinnel

2. Calibrated Globe Valves: a) Tour and Anderson b) Armstrong c) Mepco.

3. Pump Discharge Valves (Triple Duty Valves):

a) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c) Taco, Inc.

4. Safety Relief Valves:

a) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. b) Spirax Sarco c) Watts Regulator Co.

5. Pressure Reducing Valves:

a) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c) Taco, Inc.

6. Automatic Flow Control Valves: a) Autoflo, Inc. b) Griswold Controls

7. Air Vents (Manual and Automatic):

a) Armstrong Machine Works b) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c) Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d) Spirax Sarco.

8. Air Separators: a) Amtrol, Inc. b) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d) Taco, Inc.



9. Compression Tanks: a) Amtrol, Inc. b) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d) Taco, Inc.

10. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks:

a) Amtrol, Inc. b) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.

11. Pump Suction Diffusers: a) Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b) Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c) Taco, Inc. d) Victaulic Company of America

12. Chemical Feeder:

a) Culligan USA b) Vulcan Laboratories, Subsidiary of Clow Corp.

13. Dielectric Unions: c) Perfection Corp. d) Watts Regulator Co. e) Epco

14. Y-Pattern Strainers:

a) Armstrong Machine Works b) Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c) Spirax Sarco.

15. Basket Strainers: a) Metraflex Co. b) Spirax Sarco c) Victaulic Company of America

1.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, seamless or electric resistance

welded, black steel pipe, plain ends.

1.03 FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.



C. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 Ductile Iron;

ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 Malleable Iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

D. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron

housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

E. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face,

bolt holes spot faced. G. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150; raised ground face, bolt

holes spot faced. H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts,

and gaskets of the following material group, end connection and facing:

1. Material Group: 1.1 2. End Connections: Butt Welding 3. Facings: Raised face

J. Unions: ANSI B16.39 malleable-iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI B.20.1.

K. Dielectric Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections for the pipe

materials in which installed; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.

L. Flexible Connectors: Refer to Division 15 “Mechanical Vibration Controls”

Section. 1.04 JOINING MATERIALS

I. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, Type E, for heating hot water and low pressure steam piping, condenser water, chilled water, make-up water and drain piping.

J. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag 1 (Silver).

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds, which produce

highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.



K. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

L. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be

handled, and design temperatures and pressures. 1.05 GENERAL DUTY VALVES See Manufacturer’s list. 1.06 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES

A. Calibrated Balance Valves: 125 psig water working pressure, 250 degrees F. maximum operating temperature, bronze body, globe valve with calibrated globe. Provide with connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valves 2 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections and 2-1/2 inch valves shall have flanged connections.

B. Pump Discharge Valves (Triple Duty Valves): 175 psig working pressure,

300 degrees F. maximum operating temperature, cast-iron body, bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem and spring, and "Teflon" packing. Valves shall have flanged connections and straight or angle pattern as indicated. Features shall include non-slam check valve with spring-loaded weighted disc, and calibrated adjustment feature to permit regulation of pump discharge flow and shutoff.

C. Pressure Reducing Valves: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body

valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and non-corrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment.

D. Safety Relief Valves: 125 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F.

maximum operating temperature; designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and BTU capacity.

E. Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: Diaphragm operated,

cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check-valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and non-corrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-



iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F. maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and BTU capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.

F. Automatic Flow Control Valves:

1. Automatic pressure compensating flow control valves, shall have a

forged brass body with bronze trim and shall be rated for 300 psi operating pressure at 250 degrees F. Valves shall be factory set to automatically maintain the flow rate within plus/minus 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential range of at least 14 times the minimum required for control.

2. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self-contained

spring loaded perforated cartridge. Components shall be non-corrosive metal (316 stainless steel and nickel plated brass). Cartridges shall be removable (under system pressure) to allow replacement with higher or lower flow rate cartridges without need to drain the system.

3. The valves shall be rated for 400 psig pressure at 250 degrees F.

temperature. Valves 2" and under shall be screwed ends with ground joint union; 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged ends.

4. Each automatic flow control valve shall be provided with pressure

tappings with quick disconnect fittings suitable for use with the portable measuring instrument specified, to verify pressure differential across flow control orifice.

5. Provide a metal identification tag (with chain) for each valve. The

tag shall be stamped with the following: Zone identification, valve model number, rated flow in gpm and differential pressure range.

6. The valves shall carry a 5 year material, workmanship and

performance warranty. 7. Approved manufacturer: Griswold Controls.

G. Automatic Flow Control Valve Balancing Hose Kit:

1. Automatic flow control balancing hose kits shall include a 4-1/2” dial pressure gage, a supply hose consisting of ball type service valve, strainer, with drain valve, and 5’ long flame retardant rubber/braided stainless steel hose, and a return hose assembly consisting of a ball type service valve and 5’ long rubber/braided stainless steel hose. The kit shall be designed to read the pressure drop across the automatic flow control valves and the temperature at that point.



2. Hose kits shall be rated for 175 psi minimum working pressure at 230 degree F operating temperature in accordance with ASTM D380-83.

3. Hose kits shall meet or exceed flame retardant testing per UL 723,

NFPA 225, ANSI 2.5, UBC 42-1, and ASTM E-84-A. 4. All balancing hose kits shall be supplied by the same manufacturer

as the automatic flow control valves.

1.07 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 225 degrees F. operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver of thumbscrew; and having 1/8 inch discharge connection and 1/2 inch inlet connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle;

bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 240 degrees F. operating temperature; and having 1/4 inch discharge connection and 1/2 inch inlet connection.

C. Standard Compression Tanks: Size and number as indicated; construct of

welded carbon steel for 125 psig working pressure, 240 degrees F. maximum operating temperature. Provide taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting; taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tank with taps constructed shall be tested and labeled in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division-1. Furnish with the following fittings and accessories:

1. Air Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass

vent tube plug, and stainless steel ball check (100 gallon unit only); sized for compression tank diameter. Design tank fittings for 125 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F. maximum operating temperature.

2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125 psig

working pressure and 240 degrees F. maximum operating temperature. Fitting shall be designed to admit air to the compression tank and drain water, plus close off the system.

3. Gage Glass: Full height and have dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4

inch diameter gage glass, and slotted metal glass guard.

D. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Size and number as indicated; construct of welded carbon steel for 125 psig working pressure, 375 degrees F. maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means of a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air charging fitting, and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with



steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Tank, with taps and supports, shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division-1.

E. Air Separator: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for

minimum 125 psig water working pressure and 3765 degrees F. operating temperature; perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into compression tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; screwed connections up to and including 2" NPS; flanged connections for 1-1/2" NPS and above; threaded blow-down connection; sized as indicated for full system flow capacity.

F. Pump Suction Diffusers: Cast-iron body, with threaded connections for 2

inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger; 175 psig working pressure, 300 degrees F. maximum operating temperature; and complete with the following features:

1. Inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump suction diameter or

greater. 2. Cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings with total free

area equal to or greater than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head.

3. Disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer. 4. Adjustable foot support, designed to carry weight of suction piping. 5. Blow-down tapping in bottom; gage tapping in side.

G. Pump Suction Diffusers: Cast-iron body, with threaded connections for 2

inch and smaller, grooved connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger; 300 psig working pressure, 230 degrees F. maximum operating temperature; and complete with the following features:

1. Inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump section diameter or

greater. 2. Cylinder strainer with 3/15 inch diameter openings, designed to

withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head. 3. Disposable fin mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer. 4. Adjustable foot support, designed to carry weight of suction piping. 5. Blow-down tapping in bottom; gage tapping in side.

H. Chemical Feeder: Bypass type chemical feeders of 5 gallon capacity,

welded steel construction; 125 psig working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.



1. Chemicals shall be specially formulated to prevent accumulation of

scale and corrosion in piping system and connected equipment, developed based on a water analysis of make-up water.

I. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125 psig working pressure cast-iron body, (ASTM A

126, Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger, threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

J. Basket Strainers: 125 psig working pressure; high tensile cast-iron body

(ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

K. T-Pattern Strainers: 750 psig working pressure, ductile iron or malleable

iron body, grooved end connections, Type 304 stainless steel strainer basket with 57 percent free area; removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

1.08 SEPARATORS

A. Provide a solids from liquids, centrifugal, vertical mounted separator. B. The separators shall be fabricated of carbon steel. All flanges shall be

150 lb., A.N.S.I., Raised Face. The Separator shall remove 98%, by weight, of separable solids 200 mesh (74 microns) and larger.

C. The separator shall be designed with tangential entry into the acceptance

chamber. Upon tangential entry, the liquid/solids are drawn through internal tangential slots and accelerated into the reduced diameter separation cylinder. The solids heavier than the carrying liquid are centrifugally spiraled down the perimeter of the separation cylinder past the deflector stool and allowed to accumulate in the separator's collection changer. The liquid (free of separable solids) will follow the vortex created and centered on the deflector stool up through the interior of the separation cylinder and into the vortex finder which becomes the separator outlet.

D. The separator shall also incorporate a pressure relief line from the

collection chamber to the venturi located in the tangential inlet to enhance separation by facilitating quiescent solids sedimentation in the collection chamber. Quiescent solids accumulation shall also be facilitated by the baffle spin arrestor below the deflector stool in the collection chamber.

E. Separation and collection of solids shall not promote excessive wear nor

require a continuous "involuntary" underflow. F. Separated solids shall be purged from the collection chamber to a timer

actuated pneumatic ball valve on a timer for S-1 and a purged liquid recovery system for S-2.



G. The purged liquid recovery system shall have a solids collection capacity of 25 pounds and a maximum operating pressure of 125 psi. It shall be comprised of a carbon steel retention vessel with lid, stainless steel internal basket with stainless steel screen, polyester-felt collection bag-50 minimum rating, and an air relief valve. The recovery system shall have a differential pressure operated indicator signifying the collection base is full.

H. Approved Manufacturer: Lakos, Ronningen - Petter, Metraflex, Griswold.

1.09 GLYCOL FLUID SYSTEMS

A. Glycol Fill Station:

1. Provide glycol fill station for pressurization, fill and drain of chilled water piping systems. The fill station shall be a single piece of equipment and include 100 gallon polyethylene tank; 1/3 horsepower, 15 gpm, 15 psig, close coupled pump; 120 V, 1 phase; fill funnel; gauge glass; discharge check valve; electric starter; factory mounted control panel and isolation valves all pre-piped and mounted on a skid. Pump shall be capable of dead head operation to maintain pressure with no damage.

B. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Wessels Company (313-875-5000).

C. Premixed Heat Transfer Fluid:

1. Provide propylene glycol pre-mixed heat transfer fluid for systems indicated on drawings and schedules. The solution shall contain ethylene glycol, corrosion inhibitors, buffers, and an anti-foam agent. The initial fill concentration of ethylene glycol shall be at least 5% greater then the indicated concentration to account for water not completely drained out of the system after flushing. Commercial automobile antifreeze solutions uninhibited glycols, or field-inhibited glycol is not acceptable.

D. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Monsanto Corp. 2. Dow Chemical - Dowtherm 3. Union Carbide - Ucartherm

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 22 13- STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING

23 22 13 Steam & Steam Condensate Piping Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steam and condensate piping system products from one of the following:

1. Safety Pressure Relief Valves:

a) Armstrong Machine Works, A-Y Division b) Spirax Sarco. c) Spence Engineering Co. d) Hoffman

2. Pressure Regulating Valves:

a) Armstrong Machine Works, A-Y Division b) Hoffman Specialty ITT, Fluid Handling Div. c) Spirax Sarco. d) Spence Engineering Co., Inc.

3. Steam Traps: a) Armstrong Machine Works. b) ITT Hoffman c) Spirax Sarco.

4. Air Vents: a) Armstrong Machine Works. b) Hoffman Specialty ITT, Fluid Handling Div. c) Spirax Sarco.

5. Dielectric Unions:

a) Perfection Corp. b) Watts Regulator Co.

6. Strainers:

a) Armstrong Machine Works. b) Hoffman Specialty ITT, Fluid Handling Div. c) Spirax Sarco. d) Spence Engineering Co.

1.02 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 below, Article "PIPE APPLICATION" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 and 80 for application as specified

in Part 3 below, seamless or electric resistance welded, black steel pipe, with beveled ends.



1.03 FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. C. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face,

bolt holes spot faced. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts,

and gaskets of the following material group, end connection and facing:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt Welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

E. Unions: ANSI B16.39, malleable-iron, Class 150 hexagonal stock, with

ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

1.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

B. Pipe Flange Gasket Material: ANSI B16.21 full-faced for cast iron and

cast bronze flanges, and raised face for steel flanges. Thickness, material, and type suitable for design temperatures and pressures.

1.05 GENERAL DUTY VALVES

A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division-15 Section "General Duty Valves". Special duty valves are specified in this Article by their generic name; refer to Part 3 below, Article "VALVE APPLICATION" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

1.06 SAFETY VALVES

A. General: Select steam safety valves for full relief of capacity of equipment

served, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Furnish complete with cast iron drip-pan elbow having threaded inlet and outlet with threads (FPT) conforming to ANSI B1.20.1; sized for full size of safety valve outlet connection.

B. Bronze Safety Valves: Cast bronze body, Class 250, with threaded (MPT)

inlet and threaded (FPT) outlet; forged copper alloy disc, fully enclosed cadmium plated steel spring having an adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off.



C. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Cast iron body and bronze seat, Class 250; forged copper alloy disc and nozzle; fully enclosed cadmium plated spring having an adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off; threaded end connections for valves 2 inch and smaller, raised face flanged inlet and threaded outlet connections for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger.

1.07 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

A. General: Select pressure reducing valves of size, capacity, and pressure rating as scheduled. Factory-set for inlet and outlet pressures as indicated.

B. Valves Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable

pressure range and positive shut-off; cast iron body with flanged end connections, hardened stainless steel trim, and replaceable valve head and seat. Provide main head stem guide fitted with flashing and pressure arresting device. Provide cover over pilot diaphragm for protection against dirt accumulation.

1.08 STEAM TRAPS

A. General: Trap capacities shall be based on hot condensate discharge.

1. Provide steam traps as follows: a) Boiler header traps, drip traps and end of main drip traps

shall be inverted bucket type. b) Traps for heat exchange equipment:

i. Under modulating control shall be float and thermostatic type on constant steam pressure shall be inverted bucket type.

c) Traps for radiators, fin tube radiation, cabinet unit heaters and similar equipment shall be thermostatic type.

2. Size steam traps with safety factors as follows:

a) Boiler header traps 1.5:1 at operating pressure differential b) Drip traps, except end of main 2:1 at operating pressure

differential c) End of main drip traps 3:1 at operating pressure differential d) Heat exchange equipment under modulating control e) 0-15 psig steam 2:1 at 1/2 psig differential pressure f) 16-30 psig steam 2:1 at 2 psig differential pressure g) over 30 psig 3:1 at 1/2 maximum differential pressure h) Heat exchange equipment 3:1 at operating pressure on

constant steam pressure differential

B. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Shall be of ASTM A-278 cast iron with float and lever mechanism of austenitic stainless steel and with a heat treated chrome steel hemispherical valve and seat. The valve and seat shall be hardened, ground and lapped for tight shut-off. The thermostatic air vent shall have an austenitic stainless steel and brass cage with a phosphor-bronze balanced pressure bellows. F&T traps shall be available with integral vacuum breaker.



C. Inverted Bucket Traps: Shall be of ASTM A-278 or 304-L stainless steel. The stainless steel mechanism shall be free-floating, employing no hinges, fixed pivots or pivot pins. Flow through the square-edged orifice, mounted in the top of the trap, shall be controlled by a hemispherical valve actuated by the inverted bucket. The valve and seat shall be chrome steel hardened, ground and lapped for tight shut-off. The inverted bucket shall be austenitic stainless steel (except for cast iron bucket weight on larger sizes) and continuously vent non-condensable gases. Inverted bucket traps shall be Armstrong Machine Works series 800, 200 or 2000.

D. Thermostatic Radiator Type Traps: Shall have threaded union inlet,

phosphor-bronze multiple convolution bellows, stainless steel seat. Valve and seat shall be renewable in-line. Trap shall be rated for 50 psig steam and 300 degrees F. Trap shall be Armstrong TS-2.

1.09 AIR VENTS

A. Quick Vents: Cast iron or brass body, with balanced pressure stainless

steel or monel thermostatic bellows, and stainless steel heads and seats. B. Float Vents: Cast iron or brass body; seamless brass float; balance

pressure thermostatic bellows; replaceable stainless steel seat, float, and head.

1.10 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: Minimum 250 psig steam working pressure; cast iron body conforming to ASTM A 278, Class 30; threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger; grade 18-8 stainless steel screen (20 mesh for 2 inch and smaller, and manufacturer recommended perforations for sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger); tapped blow-off plug.

1.11 FLASH TANKS

A. Construction flash tanks of welded steel in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, for 150 psig rating. Fabricate all welds and tappings for vents, low pressure steam and condensate outlets, high pressure condensate inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs prior to application of ASME label.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont ealth System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 22 16 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES

23 22 16 Steam & Condensate Specialties Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1. 01 CONDENSATE PUMP AND RECEIVER SETS - LARGE UNIT

A. General: Provide as indicated, condensate pump and receiver sets, of capacity as scheduled, consisting of cast-iron receiver, inlet strainer, 2 water pumps, 2 float switches, electrical controls, and accessories.

B. Receiver: Construct of close-grained cast iron. Equip with externally

adjustable two 2-pole float switches, water level gage, condensate thermometer, 2 pump discharge pressure gages, 2 bronze isolation valves between receiver and pumps, and 2 lifting eye bolts.

C. Strainer: Equip receiver inlet with cast-iron inlet strainer with self-cleaning

bronze screen, dirt pocket, and clean-out plug. D. Pumps: Flange mount centrifugal water pumps on receiver. Each pump

shall be close-coupled, vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted, equipped with stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, renewable bronze case ring, and mechanical shaft seal. Provide drip-proof motor close-coupled to each pump. Mechanical seals shall be suitable for 250EF operation. Each pump shall deliver its full capacity with condensate temperatures up to 210EF at sea level, or at 2 ft. NPSH (net positive suction head).

E. Control Panel: Provide NEMA 2 control cabinet mounted on pump unit,

factory-wired for external electrical connection only, with hinged door and grounding lug. Provide the following within cabinet:

1. Combination magnetic starter for each pump with current breaker

and cover interlock. 2. Electrical alternator. 3. "Automatic-Off-On" selector switch. 4. Momentary contact "Test" push buttons for each pump. 5. Numbered terminal strip. 6. Fusible control circuit transformer for each circuit. 7. High water alarm bell and auxiliary contact for remote alarms.

F. Control Circuits: Provide completely independent pump control circuit for

each pump. Provide electrical alternator to: 1. Change operating sequence automatically after each cycle. 2. Provide simultaneous operation under peak load conditions. 3. Operate idle pump automatically, should active pump or its control

fail.

G. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont ealth System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 22 16 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES

23 22 16 Steam & Condensate Specialties Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

H. The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit and the manufacturer shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams and installation and operation instructions. The unit shall be shipped completely assembled.

I. Manufacturer:

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

condensate pump and receiver sets of one of the following:

i. Domestic Pump ITT; Fluid Handling Div. ii. Weil Pump Co. iii. Weinman Pump LFE Corp.; Fluids Control Div.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health Systems DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS

23 31 13 Metal Ducts Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Galvanized sheet metal, fabricated to comply with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525.

B. All ductwork 18 inches and wider are to be provided with Nexus type

flanged connectors. Ductmate is not an approved manufacturer. C. Duct sealing system: Indoor Galvanized duct Sealant: Hardcast Iron Grip

601 vinyl acrylic, water based, brushed on the duct sealant or Hardcast gypsum impregnated #DT tape with # FTA 20 activator/adhesive, water based applied according to manufacturer direction.

D. Sealant Materials: Joint and seam sealant: one part, non-sag, solvent-

release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

E. Fanged joint Mastics: one-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint

sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, type S, Grade NS, class 25, use O. F. All sealants shall be U.L. rated and shall confirm to NFPA 90A.

1.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Supply Air Ductwork:

1. Classification

a) Static Pressure class 4” W.G. or higher b) Velocity Level 2500 FPM maximum c) Seal Classification Class A d) Leakage Classification Maximum1%

2. Sheet Metal Minimum thickness Maximum reinforcement Dimension of longest side Gage Spacing a) Up through 18” 24 8’ b) 19” through 30” 22 8’ c) 31” through 60” 20 4’ d) 61” through 84” 18 2 1/2'

e) over 84” 16 2’

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health Systems DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS

23 31 13 Metal Ducts Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

A. Return, Relief, Exhaust and Outside Air Ductwork:

1. Classification

a) Static Pressure Class 3” or lower b) Velocity Level 1800 FPM c) Seal Classification Class A d) Leakage Classification Maximum 1 %

2. Sheet Metal Minimum Thickness Maximum reinforcement Dimension of longest side Gage Spacing

a) Up through 12” 26 b) 13” through 30” 24 8’ c) 31” through 54” 22 5’ d) 55” through 84” 20 3’ e) over 84” 18 2’

B. Provide intermediate support angles per SMACNA

C. Flexible Ducts: Maximum Run 4’-0”

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 33 00 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

A. Dampers:

1. Low pressure Manual Balancing Dampers: Provide damper of single blade type of multi-blade type, construction in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Air Balance, Inc. Model 515 b) Ruskin Mfg. Co. Model CD 50

B. Fire and Smoke Damper:

1. Fire Damper; Provide type B fire damper, with dynamic operation, Installed with blades out of the air stream. Construct casing of 11 gauge galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish. Provide fusible link rated at 160 t0 165 degrees Fahrenheit unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features.

2. Damper Blade Assembly: Multi-Blade type. 3. Blade Material: Steel, match casing.

C. Smoke Damper:

1. Frame shall be a minimum of 0.125” steel formed into structural hat channel shape with corner reinforced. Bearings shall be steel sleeve turning in hole in the frame. The blades be aluminum airfoil shaped double skin construction with opposed blade action. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber designed to withstand 450 degrees Fahrenheit and jam seals shall be flexible metal compression type.

2. Each smoke damper shall be classified by Underwriter’s

Laboratories as a leakage rated damper under the latest version of UL 555S, and bear a UL label attesting to the same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper size covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and UL qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL 555S shall be leakage Class 1 (4cfm/ft at 1” w.g)

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 33 00 – DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

3. As part of the UL qualification, damper shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (to open and close) under HVAC system operating conditions, with pressure of at least 4” w.g. in the closed position and 4000 fpm air velocity in the open position.

4. In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, in the

smoke damper and their operators shall be qualified under UL 555S to an elevated temperature of 250 F. Appropriate pneumatic operators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer.

5. At the time of damper fabrication, damper and operator shall be

supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL 555S qualifications for both damper and operators. Damper and operator assembly shall be factory cycled 10 times to assure operation. All detection and / or alarm or other system shall be furnished by others as detailed elsewhere in the specifications. Damper shall be design to fail closed upon loss of pressure.

D Damper Motor:

1. Provide for modulating of two position action, one actuator for every 25 Sq.ft of damper area.

2. Permanent Split Capacitor or shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-

immersed and sealed gear trains. E. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 51 00 - BREECHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

23 51 00 Breeching, Chimney And Stacks Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 DOUBLE WALL METAL VENTS

A. Type B Gas Vents:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type B double wall gas vents of one of the following:

a) American Metal Products Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. b) Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. c) Selkirk Metalbestos.

2. Description: Double wall gas vents, UL listed for Type B, consisting

of an inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, with the following minimum thicknesses:

Size Inner Pipe Outer Pipe

a) Round 6" I.D. and Smaller 0.012" 0.0187" b) Round 7" to 18" I.D. 0.014" 0.0187" c) Round 20" to 24" I.D. 0.018" 0.0217" d) Oval 4" and Smaller 0.012" 0.0187" e) Oval 5" to 6" 0.014" 0.0187"

3. Accessories: UL-labeled tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire stop spacers, and fasteners, fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.

B. All Steel, Positive Pressure, Double Wall Vents:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide all steel, positive pressure double wall vents of one of the following:

a) Selkirk Metalbestos b) Van Packer c) Stacks, Inc., Div of Air Management, Inc. d) General Products Co., Inc. e) Hart & Cooley

2. Description: UL-labeled double wall metal stacks for use with

building heating equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels as described in NFPA 211.



3. Construction: 1" minimum air space between walls; inner jacket of Type 316 stainless steel, 0.035" thick; outer jacket of aluminum coated steel of the following thickness:

a) Size 10" to 24": 0.025" thick. b) Size 26" to 48": 0.034" thick.

4. Accessories: UL-labeled tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire stop spacers, and fasteners fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.

1.02 FABRICATED METAL BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS

A. Materials:

1. Black, carbon, hot-rolled steel complying with ASTM A 569, except breechings less than 24" diameter (or longest side) may be galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality with ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphated.

2. Minimum gages for corresponding sizes as indicated (diameter or

longest side dimension):

SIZES THICKNESS – GAGE a) up to 12" 18 b) 13" to 24" 16 c) 25" to 36" 14 d) 37" to 60" 12 e) over 60" 10

B. Fabrication:

1. Shop fabricate breechings and chimneys in as complete as

possible to minimize field welding. Match-mark sections for field assembly and coordination of installation.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Welded, except longitudinal seams for

breechings less than 24" diameter (or longest side) may be Acme grooved type.

3. End Joints: Weld, lap and bolt, or use companion flanges; except

breechings less than 24" diameter (or longest side) may have end joints beaded and crimped.



4. Reinforcement: Reinforce rectangular breechings with angle frames as follows for corresponding long side dimensions; and reinforce round breechings with either flanged girth joints or angle frames as follows for corresponding diameter:

SIZES REINFORCING INTERVAL

a) up to 30" No reinforcing required. b) 31" to 36" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" 30" o.c. d) 37" to 60" 2" x 2" x 1/4" 30" o.c. e) over 60" 3" x 3" x 1/2" 30" o.c.

5. Fabricate breeching and chimneys fittings to match adjoining

materials. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to associated breeching width. Limit angular tapers to 20 degrees maximum for expanding tapers. Install accessories during fabrication to greatest extent possible.

C. Accessories and Specialties:

1. Provide accessories and specialties of types and sizes required to

comply with breeching requirements including proper connection of equipment.

2. Barometric Dampers: Adjustable, self-actuating draft dampers full

size of breeching. 3. Cleanout Doors: Same gage as breeching; size and location as

indicated.

1.03 BREECHING EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General:

1. Furnish fabric reinforced, insulated, elastomeric cover expansion joint for a hot gas duct system operating at 1000EF.

B. Expansion Joint:

1. The expansion joint shall be manufactured in a belt configuration

consisting of various plies of materials laid one over the other and vulcanized, bonded or sewn in the clamp or splice areas.

2. The expansion joint shall be constructed with a minimum of three

gas barriers. The outside layer shall be a fabric reinforced, elastomeric coated and vulcanized cover with a minimum elastomer coating on both sides of the fabric.

3. The internal layers shall consist of a minimum of one ply of 0.5 mil

teflon sheet, three plies of high temperature reinforcing fabric and thermal insulation. The inside layer shall be a teflon impregnated fiberglass with a minimum thickness of 0.015 inches.



4. All corners on rectangular expansion joints shall be designed with

minimum radii of 8 inches. 5. Ductwork flanges shall be designed to accommodate 4 inch

expansion joint flanges and a minimum setback of 2 inches. 6. All materials shall be 100% asbestos free. 7. The expansion joint shall be designed to take the system

pressures, temperatures and movements without imposing any significant forces on the ductwork.

8. Insulation or lagging over the top of the expansion joint shall not be

permitted. 9. Rectangular expansion joints shall be Style 501-HT Belt Type as

manufactured by Holz Rubber Company. 10. Round expansion joints shall be Style 945-HT Flanged Type as

manufactured by Holz Rubber Company.

C. Metalwork:

1. The retaining bars shall be made of 3/8" x 2" A-36 rounded edge, bar stock with slotted holes unless specified otherwise.

2. Rectangular angle frames shall be made of 1/4" A-36 steel, unless

specified otherwise, designed for welding to 3" duct flanges. 3. Provide baffle or flow liners designed for welding to the ductwork

and to accommodate the system movements. 4. Entire installation shall conform to manufacturers

recommendations. 5. Where boilers share a common stack, there should be a positive

shut off damper/sliding blank located in the breeching of each boiler to provide a positive shut off.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health system DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 52 00 - BOILERS

23 52 00 Boilers Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 19


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide packaged fire tube boilers as manufactured by:

1. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. Aqua-Chem, Inc. 2. Kewanee. 3. B&W.

1.02 PACKAGED FIRETUBE BOILERS

A. General Description: Scotch marine boilers shall be factory-assembled and tested, packaged, multi-pass, horizontal fire tube boilers of dry or wet back type. Boilers shall be factory-mounted on heavy steel base frame, complete with integral forced draft burner, burner controls, oxygen trim, boiler trim, feed water economizer and refractory. Factory-assemble and wire boilers so that only water, steam, fuel, blow down, electrical power and vent connections are required.

1. Provide minimum 5 sq. ft. of heating surface per rated bhp. 2. Capacities and electrical characteristics are scheduled on the

Drawing. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard number of hand holes in boiler

shell, and manhole on boilers over 48" in diameter. Provide 2 lifting lugs, permanently attached to top of boiler.

B. Front and rear doors: Davited, sealed with heat resistant gaskets and

fastened with lugs and cap-screws. Design doors so front and rear tube sheets and all flues are fully accessible for inspection and cleaning when doors are open. Refer to Drawings for door swing direction.

1. Provide observation ports at each end of boiler for inspection of

flame conditions. Observation ports shall be shielded with a slide gate or hinged gate.

C. Refractory: Provide refractory and insulation in door construction,

accessible for inspection and maintenance. D. Exhaust gas vent: On top of boiler, complete with stack thermometer,

economizer and outlet damper. E. Insulation and jacket: Minimum of 2" thick fiberglass blanket insulation on

boiler shell, cover with sheet metal jacket of manufacturer's standard gage.

F. Painting: Factory-painted hard enamel finish on boiler, base frame and

components assembly.



G. Steam Boiler Trim:

1. Water column: Complete with try-cocks, gage glass set, and gage glass and water column blowdown valves.

2. Shunt (Pushbutton) to manually by-pass alarm when blowing down

the water column. 3. Low water cutoff: An integral part of the boiler feed-water control,

factory-wired into burner control circuit to prevent burner operation if boiler water level falls below safe operating level; complete with manual reset device.

4. Auxiliary low water cutoff: A second low water cutoff, mounted

below primary unit, and wired in series to primary unit control circuit. Manual reset.

5. Steam pressure gage: Located on front end of boiler including anti-

siphon loop, shut-off gate valve and test connection. Range shall suit operating pressure.

6. Steam safety valves: Type and size to comply with ASME Code

requirements. 7. Steam pressure controls: To regulate burner operation, mounted

near water column, complete with high limit pressure control.

H. Combination Gas/Oil Burner: Combination low pressure air atomizing type for oil and high radiant multi-port type for gas, integral with front head of boiler, and approved for operation with commercial #2 fuel oil and natural.

I. Gas Burner Operation:

1. Full modulation principle, 10 to 1 turndown ratio. 2. Return burner to low fire position for ignition.

J. Gas Pilot: Premix type with automatic electric ignition, complete with electronic detector to monitor pilot so primary fuel valve cannot open until pilot flame has been established. Also, pilot gas piping shall accommodate 30# propane cylinder.

K. Forced draft blower: For combustion air, mounted on front of boiler, with

cast aluminum blower wheel and radial blades, directly connected to flanged type motor.



L. Combustion air control:

1. Motor-operated damper and cam-operated fuel metering valves, with parallel positioning control motor to regulate fire according to load demand. Operation of damper control motor shall be regulated by transmitters and loop controllers.

M. #2 Fuel Oil Burner Operation:

1. Full modulation principle, 8 to 1 turndown ratio. 2. Return burner to low fire position for ignition.

N. Oil Pilot: Air atomizing type with automatic electric ignition, complete with electronic detector to monitor pilot so primary oil valve cannot open until pilot flame has been established.

O. Oil Burner Piping: Integrally mounted, including oil pressure regulating

devices, oil metering controls, solenoid shutoff valves, pressure gages, and fuel oil strainer.

P. Oil Burner Unit: Low pressure air atomizing system including:

1. Direct driven air compressor, lubricating oil tank, oil level indicator, inlet air filter, and air pressure gage.

2. Separate air compressor module mounted on boiler base rail. 3. Direct driven air compressor, lubricating oil tank, oil level indicator,

inlet air filter, and air pressure gage. 4. Separate air compressor module mounted on boiler base frame.

Q. Gas Burner Piping: Integrally mounted gas piping including primary gas shutoff valve, motor operated with spring return, designed to start and stop gas burner, and to close automatically in event of power failure, flame failure, or low water condition. Gas train shall include lubricated plug cock located upstream of primary valve for manual shutoff, plugged leakage test cock, and second lubricated plug cock; additional devices required, include:

1. A proof of closure switch on primary valve, and high and low gas

pressure switches. 2. A second motorized safety shutoff valve and additional plugged

leakage test cock. 3. A vent valve located between safety shutoff valves. 4. A main gas regulator to reduce 20 psig gas pressure to that

required by the burner.



1.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Boiler Shell: Designed, constructed, and hydrostatically tested in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section I “Power Boilers” and bearing the appropriate ASME label.

B. Controls: Boiler controls shall be provided by the boiler supplier and shall

include the installation of all devices, control panels, sensors, meters, control valves, wiring, conduit, etc., required to provide a complete and fully functioning system.

1.04 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. General: The control system shall include the Boiler Control System, the Burner Management System, the Plant Master System, and the System Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA). The control system shall be capable of being expanded to control additional boilers. Controls shall be provided with the necessary communication capabilities and hardware to allow integration with the SCADA System.

B. Control Panels: Provide a free-standing control panel for housing the

Boiler Controls, one per boiler. Provide one Burner Management control panel for each boiler, mounted on the boiler. Provide one control panel for the Plant Master. Provide a SCADA System consisting of a CRT Screen (Monitor), computer (tower configuration), laser printer, keyboard, CD Rom (Read and Write), tape back-up, and all required software with back-up discs (or CD’s). All control panels will be provided with built-in spare, pre-wired, power packs. All control panels will be provided with SOLA power conditioner and isolation transformer.

C. Quality Assurance: The control system, data acquisition system,

transmitters, control valves, and actuators shall be supplied by the packaged boiler vendor and shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer who is regularly engaged in boiler control projects. The package boiler vendor must accept sole source responsibility for system design, manufacture, installation and start-up of the control systems. Arrange system so that the failure of the control system for one boiler does not affect the automatic or manual operation of the other boilers. Any electrical signal that is common to all boilers (such as plant master control signals, header pressure transmitter signal, etc.) shall be electrically isolate din each boiler section from common equipment.

D. Acceptance Criteria: As a minimum, Combustion Test Reports shall be provided by the Contractor upon completion of installation. Reports shall detail combustion performance at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of capacity. These reports shall be performed for each fuel burned. They shall include the following: 1. Flue Gas Oxygen Reading. 2. Flue Gas Temperature leaving Boiler. 3. Flue Gas Temperature leaving Economizer. 4. Fuel Flow.



5. Boiler Efficiency (ASME by losses). 6. NOx (in PPM and lb/MMBTU). 7. Opacity. 8. CO (Carbon Monoxide). 9. Steam Output (lbs/Hr.).

E. Submittals:

1. Automatic Combustion Control and Boiler Control Systems:

a) SAMA Combustion Control Strategy Diagrams. b) Sequence of Operation. c) Bill of materials with cross-reference to cut sheets and

drawings. d) All drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD 2000 format.

2. Control Instrumentation Cabinets:

a) Drawings with complete dimensions showing (3) views of cabinet, instrument and control locations, and door swing.

b) Description of cabinet construction. c) Wiring diagrams for all cabinet and field devices. d) Catalog cuts of all instruments, controls and accessories. e) Installation and calibration instructions for all transmitters.

3. Steam, Gas, Fuel Oil and Feed Water Flow Meters: a) Flow meter primary element design, size, performance, and

sizing calculations. Sizing calculations shall include as a minimum the following: i. Fluid. ii. Flow Rate (minimum nominal and maximum). iii. Temperature. iv. Pressure. v. Pressure, temperature and turndown limitations. vi. Manufacturer’s installation and calibration instructions

for the fluid being metered. 1.05 CONTROL CABINET

A. Control cabinets shall be free-standing or pedestal mounted, factory-

assembled steel enclosures with all indicators, controllers, control switches, indicating lights installed on the cabinet door and other components mounted on interior sub-bases. Provide, as a minimum, NEMA 12 construction for all panels.

B. Cabinets shall be constructed of 14 gage steel with welded seams.

Corners shall be ground smooth and filled. Doors shall be constructed of 14 gage steel with quarter turn latches or one key-locking vault handle. All doors shall be fully gasketed to NEMA 12 standards. All metal surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, primed and finished. Interiors shall be gloss white enamel. Exteriors shall be gray textured polyurethane enamel to provide resistance to fuel oils, solvents and abrasions.



C. Devices, components, etc., that are housed in the cabinets shall be suitable for locating in a power plant atmosphere where temperatures may be as low as 40 degrees F. (non-condensing), or as high as 120 degrees F. If necessary, provide a cooling system consisting of a direct expansion coil with water cooled condenser located outside the cabinet, R-134a compressors, fan, filter and air inlet and outlet grilles cut out in the cabinets.

D. Cabinets shall be front accessible via hinged doors. Provide an electrical

interlock so that they cannot be opened unless the power supply to the cabinet is disconnected.

E. All control cabinets shall be assembled, pre-wired and factory tested

before shipment. Provide flanged, visible knife gate, fused disconnect switches lockable in the “ON” and “OFF” positions. Provide a cabinet power pushbutton and a main power indicating light. Provide an external 120V service receptacle, with an independent disconnect and appropriate warning label for this receptacle.

F. Provide engraved plastic laminated nameplates for all devices on front of

cabinet. Nameplates shall have white letters on black background, and shall be secured to the cabinet front with stainless steel rivets, screws, or other mechanical means. Labels secured by adhesives are not acceptable.

G. All field wiring shall terminate at DIN rail mounted, machine marked, field

terminal strips with pressure plate wire clamping. No more than two wires allowed per terminal block connection. Provide 10% spare terminals of each signal type in Boiler Control Panels and 25% spares in the Plant Master Control Panel. Wire nuts and butt splices are not allowed. All wiring shall be contained in ventilated Panduit style ducts, or securely bundled with tie wraps at no more than 6” intervals. Individual wires must have machine printed wire numbers at each end of each wire. All AC and DC wiring shall be segregated in separate wiring ducts or bundles. 4-20 mA, 1-5 Vdc, and communications signals shall be wired with shielded cables, properly terminated shields, and the outer jacket of each end of each cable shall be marked with machine printed wire numbers. Provide sufficient subsection fusing to allow any boiler section or major portion of the panel to be powered down without affecting the remainder of the panel. Daisy chaining of AC hot and neutral conductors shall be limited to a particular subsection fuse, and disconnection shall not affect fuse subsections.

H. All cabinet mounted devices and construction methods shall be in

compliance with UL 508. The finished control panel (including cabinet, wiring, front panel and internal instruments, and related construction methods) shall be inspected as a whole and labeled as complying with UL 508 by a certified UL508 control panel manufacturer. The control panel manufacturer shall be certified by an OSHA Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as UL, ETL or equal, and the NRTL shall inspect the manufacturer quarterly to insure continuous compliance. Lack of an NRTL certified UL508 wiring methods inspection and label will be grounds



for rejection and return of the control panel to the manufacturer. A UL508 label that certifies only that the cabinet sheet metal and gasketing construction methods comply with UL508 is not acceptable.

1.06 CABINET MOUNTED DEVICES

A. Status and Alarm Annunciation:

1. Provide a single horn, alarm silence, alarm acknowledge, and alarm test push-buttons for all alarms in each cabinet.

2. Each status and alarm condition must activate a visual indication

with a distinct, descriptive, English language label to allow the operator to locate the cause of the alarm. Provide any necessary sensors or other devices required to produce the status and alarms described below.

3. Alarm indicator lamps shall be low voltage long life intensity LED

style. 4. The horn shall sound for every new alarm, even if the horn was

previously silenced. 5. All alarms shall be communicated to the SCADA via an RS-485

network. 6. Provide the following status and alarm signals for the plant master

control cabinet:

a) Low Steam Header Pressure b) Low Feedwater Header Pressure c) High Steam Header Pressure

7. Provide the following status and alarm signals for each boiler

control cabinet: a) Run b) Tripped c) Off Line d) High Flue Gas Temperature e) High Boiler Steam Pressure f) High Water Level (Drum) g) Low Oxygen h) High Burner Gas Pressure i) Low Burner Gas Supply Pressure j) High Boiler Pressure Lockout k) Low Atomization Pressure Lockout l) Low Combustion Air Flow m) FD Fan Failure n) Low Purge Air Flow o) Input Module Failure p) Output Module Failure q) Pilot/Burner Failure



r) Low Pilot Gas Pressure s) Primary Low Water Cut-Off t) Auxiliary Low Water Cut-Off

B. Loop Controllers:

1. All controllers shall be of US manufacture, microprocessor-based

and shall be of single or multiple loop design to assure system integrity. Provide one controller per loop unless dual loops are specifically permitted in the following Sections. Controllers shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories or an OSHA NRTL. Controllers shall be flush mounted in the control cabinet and shall have NEMA 13 rated (oil/water spray) front panel displays, keyboard, cabinet to case and case to front panel gasketing. Controllers shall be able to operate indefinitely in 120 deg. F locations with no cooling fans. Provide a 4-1/2 digit numeric display on each controller for operator display of up to 10 process variables. Provide a field configurable alphanumeric, English language, message center display with 25 message x 16 character memory for descriptors of process variable, alarm, and tuning parameter display channels. Provide two 50 segment bar graphs to display an analog interpretation of controlled variable, and set point. Provide a 20 segment bar graph for the loop output. When dual loops are utilized, provide LED indicators with job specific custom labels to indicate which loop is active. Loop display selection shall be by front panel pushbutton.

2. Each controller shall be installed with a minimum I/O (Input/Output)

complement of: five 1-5V/4-20mA inputs, two 4-20mA outputs, three 120Vac discrete inputs, and two 5A/120Vac relay contact outputs. Controller I/O quantities shall be expandable with plug-in I/O option cards. Provide sufficient I/O cards (or extra controllers) to satisfy all I/O described in the individual controller specification sections below. Any unused I/O (of the described I/O complement) shall be wired to numbered field terminal blocks as spares for future data acquisition points. Provide pre-wired 120 Vac interfacing relays if the controller provided requires 24 Vdc discrete input/output. Provide a separate isolated 24 Vdc supply for each control section that is sized to power five 4-20mA transmitters per controllers, pre-wired to field terminal strip.

3. Each controller shall be field configurable via an integral front panel

keypad. Control strategy shall be free form blockware type, and shall be completely field configurable from the front panel keypad. Configuration and calibration data shall be stored in a nonvolatile EEPROM plug-in memory module with a minimum of 10 year data retention (powered down). In addition, a redundant plug-in backup memory module shall be furnished that will automatically download into the primary memory in the event of primary memory data corruption. The user shall be able to copy primary to backup, and backup to primary from the front panel at any time. The local plant operating personnel must be able to quickly (5-10 minutes) load a



replacement controller board’s memory by simply plugging in a memory module. As an alternate to plug-in memory modules, provide a laptop computer, software, cables, and interface hardware to allow loop controller configuration downloading via a personal computer.

4. Each controller shall be equipped with an RS-485 communications

data highway pre-wired to the field terminal strip (use Belden 3106A cable for both panel and field wiring). Each control panel shall include RS485 optical isolation to assure isolation of each control panel from the plant control panels. The RS485 protocol shall allow: Auto/Manual mode selection, changing any set points, changing the manual output, sensing and silencing alarms, changing any configuration parameter (including PID tuning), change timers, etc…. Sensor data required for control shall not be transmitted from controller to controller over the RS485 data highway unless the data highway is fully redundant.

5. When specified in the sections that follow, provide a dedicated hard

manual backup station for each 4-20 mA control output to insure that operator manual control is possible in the event of loop controller memory corruption, CPU failure, or service requirement. The hard manual backup station shall be driven by dedicated circuitry, independent of the CPU, and shall provide bumpless transfer into and out of backup mode. In the backup mode, the operator shall have control of the output via up/down push buttons and have 0-100% output indication via an output indicator. The backup station may be integral to the loop controller, or a separate dedicated manual backup station may be mounted immediately adjacent to the main loop controller. If integral, the backup circuitry must function when the CPU board is removed for servicing.

6. Control signals that are shared by multiple boilers (e.g. Plant

master demand, steam header pressure, alarm horn, alarm silence, and RS485 communication links) shall have signal isolators in each control panel. This is to prevent an equipment or wiring fault in one panel from shutting down any other panel.

7. Each alarm condition must activate a separate visual indication to

allow the operator to locate the cause of the alarm. 8. This shall be accomplished with a microprocessor based English

language alarm message display. The loop controllers may provide this function if the messages are in English, and if the visual alarm condition is unambiguous.



1.07 PLANT MASTER CONTROLLER

A. The plant master controller shall match the individual boiler controllers and shall provide for PID control of firing rate demand based on steam header pressure with a feed-forward signal from total plant steam flow. The output of the control shall go to the two (2) boiler controllers. The controller shall provide for digital display of the following:

1. Controller Output. 2. Plant Steam Pressure. 3. Plant Steam Pressure Setpoint. 4. Plant Total Steam Generation. 5. Outdoor Temp.

B. Displays may be provided via separate digital indicators or integrated into

the controller. Displays shall read out in engineering units. Each displayed value shall be identified with an unambiguous English language legend.

1. Outputs will be as follows:

a) Boiler Master Signal. b) Total Plant Steam Flow. c) Totalized Steam Flow Pulse. d) Logic output to properly sequence the operation of boilers,

including sequencing the boilers to meet demand, load sharing and optimization of the steam generating equipment.

2. Inputs shall be as follows:

a) Steam pressure signal. b) Steam flow signal from each of two (2) boilers. c) Outdoor temperature. d) Boiler lead and select.

C. The controller shall include an RS-485 Network interface to communicate

all control signals within the controller to a future SCADA system via a duplex two-wire twisted pair. The controller shall be Preferred Instruments Model PCC-III-IFRO.

D. The controller shall have provisions available for expansion to control two

(2) additional boilers in the future.

1.08 BOILER CONTROLLER

A. Each boiler shall be provided with a boiler controller. This controller shall control the burner jackshaft actuator in response to the plant master demand signal or in response to boiler drum pressure and a local set point. Feedback shall be taken from the fuel gas flow transmitter. The controlled variables shall be fuel gas flow and air flow. The primary analog output shall modulate the jackshaft actuator of each boiler. All the logic required to insure that pre-purge, post-purge, light-off, and burner



modulating cycles are automatic and shall be provided within the controller.

B. The integral oxygen trim capability of the controller shall provide PID trim

control of fuel gas in response to changing oxygen level in the stack and burner firing rate. The controller shall calculate and display the boiler efficiency using the ASME “by losses” method.

C. Control shall contain digital and analog display of measured oxygen level

and oxygen set point, characterized set point curves for natural gas fuel, adaptive gain as a function of firing rate, and all necessary logic to interface with the burner flame safeguard system.

D. The set point curve for natural gas shall consist of at least 11 breakpoints.

Curves shall be entered via the integral controller configuration editing key pad, external devices shall not be required. Curves shall be password protected. The boiler plant supervisor shall be trained to enter or modify these curves. Demonstration of successful training will be required before acceptance of installation.

E. Oxygen signal shall be the process variable for a Trim PID loop. The Trim

PID loops set point shall be based on firing rate. The set point shall be determined by an 11 point F(x) functions. The output of the Trim PID loop shall bias the set point of the differential pressure PID loop.

F. It shall be possible to enable or disable Trim from the front cabinet. An

LED shall indicate that Trim is active. Controller shall have a low oxygen signal which will shut off Trim, and sound alarm.

G. Boiler Controller shall be installed in the control panel supplied by the

boiler manufacturer. Flame Safeguard system shall be furnished in this panel. The controller shall include all the logic required to interface with the Flame Safeguard system to insure that pre-purge, post-purge, light-off, and burner modulating cycles are automated.

H. The controller’s digital displays shall include the following in their

respective engineering units:

1. Fuel Valve % 2. Drum Steam Pressure 3. Gas Flow 4. Plant Master Demand Bias 5. Local Setpoint 6. Oxygen Signal 7. Oxygen Trim Setpoint 8. Stack Temperature 9. Boiler Efficiency 10. Boiler Water Temperature



I. Displays may be provided via separate digital indicators or integrated into the controller. Displays shall read out in engineering units. Each displayed value shall be identified with an unambiguous English language legend.

1. The controllers output shall be:

a) Jackshaft Drive (analog) b) Oxygen Trim (analog) c) Steam Flow (analog) d) Remote Audible Alarm (contact)

2. The controller inputs shall be:

a) Plant Master Signal (analog) b) Drum Pressure (analog) c) Gas Flow (analog) d) Flue Gas Temperature (analog) e) Outside Air Temperature (analog) f) Stack Oxygen Content (analog) g) FSG Modulate (discrete) h) FSG Purge (discrete)

J. The controller shall include an RS-485 Network interface to communicate

all control signals within the controller to a future SCADA system via a duplex two-wire twisted pair. The controller shall be Preferred Instruments Model PCC-III-IFRO.

1.09 FIELD DEVICES

The following field devices shall be provided and installed to provide a complete working system:

A. Oxygen Analyzers:

1. Analyzers shall be provided for each boiler, and they shall be the

stack mounted and utilize a zirconium sensing element. Element shall be inserted directly in the process flue gas steam and shall be in direct contact with the process gases. Sensing element shall be contained within a protective housing mounted to the duct work by means of an adapter plate, all furnished by the manufacturer. Analyzer shall be equipped with a facility to allow daily calibration check without removing the analyzer from the process. That is, sample gases may be injected directly on the sensing element while the analyzer is in the process. In order to eliminate the temperature effect of the flue gases, the cell temperature in the probe shall be maintained at 1,550 degrees F. by means of the temperature controller equipped with cold junction compensation installed in each Boiler Controller. Controller shall convert signal to a 4-20 mAdc representing a 0-10% oxygen as a linear function. Furnish reference and calibration gas system for each boiler consisting of gas supply, regulator with relief valve, gauge and



necessary valving and piping. Include electrical power connections and all piping for distribution to calibration gas connection on each analyzer.

B. Natural Gas Flow Transmitters:

1. Provide one Gas flow transmitter for each boiler. Flow meters shall

be of the Vortex shedding type and shall include a pressure transmitter temperature and pressure and temperature compensation flow computer for each transmitter. Flow meters shall be selected for 15:1 installed turndown, and 1.3% of rate accuracy. Install with 35 pipe diameters of straight pipe to maintain accuracy. Output shall be isolated 4-20 mAdc.

2. Final arrangement of burner gas piping shall be provided by the

package boiler vendor to insure the proper length and diameter of piping for accurate measurement.

3. Vortex shedding flow meter, with totalizing abilities, shall be as

manufactured by Johnson Yokagawa, or as approved.

C. Steam Flow Transmitters:

1. Provide one Steam flow measuring system to include a vortex shedding flow meter. Metering system shall be sized for 10 to 1 turn-down. The signal shall then be pressure compensated by the control system.

2. Provide steam flow meters for main steam header and steam

output of each boiler. 3. Flow transmitters shall have 0.25% F.S. (BSL) accuracy, NEMA 4

housing, and provide a 4-20 mAdc output. 4. Vortex shedding steam flow meters shall be as manufactured by

Johnson Yokagawa or as approved.

D. Temperature Transmitters:

1. Provide temperature transmitters utilizing platinum RTD’s conforming to international standard ITT-68. Resistance shall be 100 ohms at 0 degrees C. with tolerances per BS 19104 and DIN 43760. All RTD’s shall be inserted in protective sheaths or wells, suitable for the environment. Included shall be the electronics accepting the RTD inputs to provide a two wire 4-20 mAdc output to control cabinets. Transmitters shall be +0.2% accuracy of calibrated span to include combined effects of transmitter repeatability, hysteresis, linearity and an adjustment resolution.



The following points shall be monitored for each boiler: a) Flue Gas Temperature leaving boiler and economizer. b) Feed water temperature entering economizer and boiler. c) Combustion air temperature.

E. Actuators:

1. Provide electric actuators for each boiler jackshaft drive, fuel valves, feed water valves, combustion air dampers, etc., capable of accepting 4-20 mA control input.

F. Pressure Transmitters:

1. Pressure transmitters shall have 0.25% F.S. (BSL) accuracy,

process fluid isolating diaphragms, 5:1 field calibration adjustability, NEMA 4 housing, and provide a 4-20 mAdc output.

2. Transmitters shall be installed with a calibration valve manifold

(steam service units shall include an isolating siphon). 3. The following transmitters shall be provided:

a) Steam Header Pressure b) Feed Water Header Pressure c) Individual Boiler Steam Pressure d) Natural Gas Pressure e) Fuel Oil Pressure

G. Level Transmitters:

1. Provide transmitters for Drum Level. Differential Pressure

transmitters shall have 0.25% F.S. (BSL) accuracy, process fluid isolating diaphragms, 5:1 field calibration adjustability, NEMA 4 housing, and provide a 4-20 mAdc output.

2. Transmitters shall be installed with a calibration and balancing

valve manifold and with sensing line drip legs with blow down valves.

3. Differential pressure transmitters shall be Fisher-Rosemount, or as

approved.

H. Water Flow Transmitters:

1. Provide flow meters for feed water flow. Flow meters shall be of positive displacement type.

2. Flow meters shall be selected for 1.5% of rate accuracy. Output

shall be isolated 4-20 mAdc. Meters shall be located in straight run of piping the same size as the meter body. Provide proper length of straight piping upstream and downstream of each flow meter.



3. Provide a calibration sheet for each field device indicating the calibrated range, date and method of calibration. Instruments shall be calibrated at a minimum of three points.

4. Install a 60 mesh strainer upstream of the transmitter with three

valve bypass around transmitter and strainer.

I. Fuel Oil Flow Meter:

1. Fuel oil flow meters shall be of the helix gear, positive displacement type with ANSI Class 300 flanges and shall be “Helix” Model PDH-15 as manufactured by EMCO, or as approved.

1.010 FLAME SAFETY AND SUPERVISORY CONTROLS FOR AUTOMATIC

PROGRAMMING OF BURNER CONTROL

A. Provide a complete system of flame safety and supervisory controls for each boiler for the automatic programming of the burner which shall consist basically of the following:

1. The boiler shall be provided with a flame safeguard system of the

electronic type with positive, timed programming sequences and with safety lockout control in the event of a flame failure. Flame safeguard system shall monitor burner pilot and main flames. Flame detection shall be by means of infrared flame sensing for natural gas firing and ultra-violet flame sensing for No. 2 fuel oil (firing). A flame scanner shall sense the pilot flame, and main fuel flame. The flame safeguard system shall be self-diagnostic, microprocessor based, of modular design for expansion purposes. The flame safeguard system shall comply with NFPA and shall have a non-volatile memory to which is stored historical data of its operation for future retrieval; capable of keeping record of the hours of main flame firing along with the total number of complete boiler cycles. In the event of combustion air failure, pilot failure, main flame failure, low water cutout, or high steam pressure, the flame safeguard system shall cause a safety shutdown. The flame safeguard shall incorporate the following interlocks: a) Forced draft fan failure. b) Low windbox air pressure. c) Low combustion air flow. d) Primary low water cutoff. e) Secondary low water cutoff. f) Drum steam pressure high. g) Drum steam pressure high-high (cut out). h) Low Oil Pressure i) Low atomizing steam-to-oil differential pressure. j) Low main gas pressure. k) High man gas pressure. l) Fuel valves proof-of-closure. m) Low fire position on forced draft fan damper. n) Low fire position on fuel flow control valve.



B. Burner supervisory controls shall be enclosed in a Boiler Mounted Control

Panel which shall be a NEMA 12 metal cabinet with front hinged access doors. Access doors shall be electrically interlocked so that they cannot be opened unless the power supply to the control panel is disconnected. The cabinet shall be assembled, pre-wired, and tested completely by the combustion safeguard manufacturer before shipment. The cabinet shall include a 120 volt SOLA Minicomputer regulator, flanged fused disconnect switch, a cabinet power push button, and main power indicating light. The cabinet shall also include the following items for the burner:

1. All electronic type, microprocessor based control. 2. A D.C. voltmeter to give continuous reading of flame relay voltage. 3. A flame failure indicating light. 4. Alarm, test, acknowledge and reset buttons. 5. Burner start and stop push button station. 6. All required indicating lights. 7. Indicating lights shall be of the push-to-test transformer type. 8. Fused control power transformer for 120 volt system.

C. Control panel shall be painted as per manufacturer’s standards. D. Each control component shall be properly identified with an engraved

laminated bakelite or plastic nameplate. The nameplate shall have black engraving (letters) on white background.

E. Nameplates shall be screwed on and not glued. F. Terminal blocks shall be provided for the termination of all cabinet or field

wiring. G. Terminal blocks shall be numbered to correspond with numbers on control

diagrams and all wires within the cabinets shall be identified with one piece marker at both ends.

H. Identifications as to the functions are also required for all control devices

such as relays, timers, etc. I. The following items shall be considered to be part of the flame safety and

supervisory control system:

1. An infrared flame sensing device for natural gas and an ultraviolet flame sensing device for No. 2 fuel oil for the pilot and burner. Individual scanners must be located at a point to ensure viewing of the individual burner flame. The scanner tube shall be protected from excess temperatures and dirt by a heat insulating nipple and an air sealing device, or equal construction, and an air purge shall be provided for keeping the sighting tubes clear of dirt and moisture and be connected directly to shop assembled header piping for wall boxes and observation doors.



2. A burner indicating light shall be provided at the cabinet and shall indicate as follows: Indicating light to be off at all times when there is no flame at the burner. When burner is started and when flame is established and detected, the indicating light shall turn on. In the event of flame failure of ignitor flame or main flame, alarm light shall come on indicating flame off condition at that burner.

3. An approved safety shut-off valve with manual reset shall be

provided in each gas line to each burner. Provide an IRI approved double block and bleed valves gas train at each burner per NFPA 8501. Following burner shutdown on safety, the alarm shall sound continuously until the supervisory valve is closed.

4. Gas train valves shall be Maxon. Plug valves shall be A.C.F.,

Nordstrom, Walworth, or as approved. 5. Necessary limit switches shall be furnished for proving both wide

open and low fire start positions of forced draft fan guide vanes. Limit switches shall be NEMA 1 construction as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Square D, Cutler-Hammer or as approved. Limit switch for proving low fire position of combustion control fuel valves shall be integral to the fuel valves.

6. Provide three-way air operated solenoid valve for removing control

of the forced draft fan damper from the combustion control system during the purge period in order to provide sufficient air for the purge cycle. Solenoid valve shall return control of the forced draft fan to the combustion control system after the purge cycle is ended. Solenoid valve shall be ASCO, General Control, or as approved. Provide a pressure differential switch interlocked with the flame safeguard system to prove air flow through the boiler.

7. Necessary pressure, temperature and drum water level safety

switches shall be provided to sound an alarm and/or to shut down the burners in the event of any of the following off-normal conditions:

8. Lower water level – provide hand actuated control located within

visibility of the steam drum level glass to bypass shutdown when blowing down water column. Alarm shall be manually reset after blow down is complete.

9. High and low gas pressure. 10. Excess steam drum pressure (alarm only). 11. Manually resetable fault lights must stay on after burner shutdown

to indicate which condition tripped the burner off-line initially.



J. Provide for the burner gas pilot: 1. Two (2) solenoid shut-off valves with solenoid vent valve between

the two shut-off valves. 2. Gas pressure regulator. 3. Lubricated plug cock shut-off valves. 4. Ignition transformer. (See paragraph on burners, ignitors, windbox

in Section 15570).

K. Flame safety equipment shall be as manufactured by Fireye Series E-110 with E300 expansion module, or as approved.

L. Single phase, 120 volt, 60 cycle service shall be used for operation of the

Flame Safety Equipment, and shall be fed from the Boiler Local Control Panel.

M. All equipment shall be Underwriter’s Laboratory approved and all flame

safety controls and safety interlock systems must meet the requirements of the NFPA, and all applicable state and local codes, and carry appropriate stamp of approval. This Seller is responsible for obtaining the required approvals for approval of the flame safety system.

N. Contractor shall note that the most stringent requirements shall take

precedence over conflicting requirements. O. Provide a terminal block in a NEMA 12 enclosure, mounted on the boiler

near the base for the termination of all boiler mounted equipment wiring. Wiring between the mounted device and the terminal block shall be by this Seller. Wiring between the terminal block on the boiler and the Local Control Panel will be provided under a separate contract.

1.011 BOILER CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The boiler manufacturer shall furnish the boiler with a complete and fully automatic electronic control system. The boiler manufacturer shall fully coordinate the control system, including all safeties, as to the interaction of its elements with the boiler and the boiler fuel burning system in order to provide the required capacities, efficiencies, and performance as specified.

B. The boiler shall be provided with all necessary controls, all necessary

programming sequences, and all safety interlocks. The boiler control system shall be properly interlocked with all safeties.

C. The combustion control system shall be of the single point positioning with

oxygen trim. Provide fuel flow controller and combustion air flow controller to maintain a proper ratio of fuel to air and automatically modify combustion air flow in accordance with measured oxygen in flue gases. In



addition, each combustion control system shall provide efficient and safe combustion by means of properly interconnected and coordinated control and safety devices.

D. The combustion control system shall maintain header steam pressure at

boiler outlet within + 3% of steam pressure control set point. E. Provide a master steam pressure controller to maintain header steam

pressure at set point by controlling the burner firing rate. F. Provide an oxygen analyzer and trim controller to modify measured

combustion air flow, therefore, changing fuel-to-air ratio. Oxygen analyzer shall produce an analog output signal for oxygen trim controller.

G. Oxygen Trim Controller shall interface with the Combustion Air Controller

to modify the air/fuel ratio in accordance with the measured oxygen level in the flue gas.

H. Provide a feed water controller to maintain boiler drum water level at set

point by controlling measured boiler feed water flow rate. Feed water control system shall be a 3-element system, measuring boiler drum level and boiler steam flow, with boiler drum level pressure compensation. A boiler drum level input signal shall be received from boiler mounted drum level transmitter. A boiler steam flow input signal shall be received from a remotely mounted boiler steam flow transmitter. A boiler drum pressure input signal shall be received from a boiler mounted steam pressure transmitter.

I. The boiler shall be provided with a safety high pressure limit controller to

shut down the burner in the event of an excessive limit condition. J. The boiler shall be provided with a microprocessor based flame safeguard

system as specified herein. K. The boiler control system shall be interlocked to insure that the burner

starts in low fire position. Low fire start shall be proven by means of position indicating switches. In addition, the boiler control system shall provide timed sequence pre-ignition air purge of boiler combustion chamber and boiler flue passages with the combustion air damper in full open position. The combustion air flow (differential pressure) sensor shall monitor and prove the air flow purge when the combustion air damper is automatically opened during pre-purge.

L. Each boiler shall be provided with continuous surface blow down and

manual bottom blow down.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 52 01 - BOILER ACCESSORIES

23 52 01 Boiler Accessories Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.01 BOILER VALVES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated boiler valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide boiler valves of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, with connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections.

B. Stop and Check Valves: Construct body of cast iron, ASTM A 126, Grade

B, pressure rated for 250 PSI at 450EF steam. Provide OS&Y construction, straight or angle pattern with flanged ends, and renewable bronze disc and seat ring.

C. Y-Type Blowdown Valves: Construct body of bronze, ASTM B 62,

pressure rated for 150 PSI steam. Provide Y-type globe construction, bronze seat ring, renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, and threaded ends.

D. Y-Type Blowdown Valves: Construct body of bronze, ASTM B 62,

pressure rated for 300 PSI steam. Provide Y-type globe construction, bronze seat ring, renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, threaded ends.

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide boiler

valves of one of the following:

1. Crane Co.; Valves and Fittings Div. 2. Jenkins Bros. 3. Lunkenheimer (The) Co.; Div. of Conval Corp. 4. Powell (The Wm.) Co.

1.02 SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVE AUXILIARY DEVICES

A. Drip Pan Elbows: Provide drip pan elbows on steam safety valves required to discharge to outdoors. Construct of cast iron, with bottom drain and pan drain connections.

B. Exhaust Heads: Provide exhaust heads on exhaust steam lines,

constructed of cast iron, and consisting of helico-centrifugal chamber and drain.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety

and relief valve auxiliary devices of one of the following:

1. Kunkle Valve Co., Inc. 2. Lunkenheimer (The) Co.; Div. of Conval Corp.



1.03 BOILER BLOWDOWN, SEPARATORS, VALVES AND PIPING

A. BOILER BLOWDOWN SEPARATORS:

1. Separators shall be A.S.M.E. Code constructed for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi and they shall bear A.S.M.E. stamp. Blowdown separators shall also conform to all applicable local and State Codes. Separator shall have stainless steel tangential striking plate with all surfaces of the separator and baffles constructed for quick draining and with no accumulation pockets for corrosion. Plate minimum thickness shall be 3/8". Tappings shall be of number and size as indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Water Inlet: Provide cold water inlet in discharge pipe, and 2

thermometer wells. 3. Specialties: Provide temperature regulating valve in water inlet with

temperature sensing bulb in lower thermometer well; bi-metallic thermometer in upper thermometer well; and Y-type strainer in cold water inlet line upstream of temperature regulating valve. Provide backflow prevention device in water inlet.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

boiler blow down separators of one of the following:

a) Cleaver Brooks; Div. Aqua-Chem, Inc. b) Penn Separator Corp. c) York-Shipley, Inc. d) Provide blow down piping for each boiler consisting of

connection to boiler blow down valves and combination water column and water level control.

e) Boiler Blowdown Piping: Schedule 80, ASTM A53 or ASTM A106, seamless black steel pipe with butt-welded joints, extra strong long radius butt welding fittings. Flanges shall be 300 psi steel welding neck type.

f) Water column and water level control blow down piping: Schedule 80, ASTM A53 black steel pipe with 3,000 psi steel socket welding fittings. Unions shall be 2,000 psi ground joint.

5. Blowdown Valve:

a) Slow opening cast steel straightway with flanged ends, long

stroke balanced sliding plunger type seatless. Yarway Series 3400 Type B Class 300.

b) Quick acting cast steel with flanged ends lever operated, flat seat, sliding disc double tightening type. Yarway Series 3700 Class 300.



1.04 BOILER ECONOMIZERS

A. General: Provide finned tube boiler economizers of sizes and having capacities and performance characteristics as indicated, and as specified herein.

B. Type: Provide horizontal tube, counter-current flow arrangement,

designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Provide ASME Stamp.

C. Construction: Construct economizer heating surface of 2" O.D. boiler

tubes with smooth carbon steel fins, not less than 0.060" thick, attached by continuous high-frequency resistance welding. Provide maximum fin density (pitch) of 60 fins/ft.

D. Tube Arrangement: Provide square pitch for lane blowing of soot

blowers. E. Headers: Provide Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with minimum 300 PSI

flanged connections. Provide 3/4" drain connection on lower header, and 3/4" vent connection on upper header.

F. Enclosure: Provide gas-tight, hot structure design allowing unrestricted

flow of hot gas over internal parts. Allow fin tips only, not tube walls, to be in contact with tube sheets. Construct inner casing of enclosure of 3/16" thick carbon steel. Furnish enclosure with minimum of 2" thick, factory-installed, high temperature insulation covered with corrugated, galvanized, carbon steel jacket. Paint exterior surfaces not covered with galvanized jacket with high temperature aluminum paint. Provide 16" x 16" carbon steel insulated access door for inspection and cleaning.

G. Soot blowers: Furnish economizer with one or more soot blowers as

required to obtain full coverage of heating surfaces. Install soot blowers transverse to axis of finned tubes for lane blowing.

1. Provide manually operated soot blowers.

H. Drainage: Provide economizers that are completely drainable by gravity

after installation. I. Feed water Control System: Provide feed water corrosion control system

to prevent cold-end corrosion of economizer, and to control exit gas temperatures. Design system to elevate entering water temperature to control exit gas temperature and tube metal temperature; and to automatically maintain or adjust feed water temperature to provide corrosion protection under all boiler operating loads. Provide factory-assembled system consisting of the following:

1. Heat exchanger.



2. Self-contained dual piloted tight shutoff temperature control valve with integral temperature adjustment to control flow of steam to preheater.

3. Feed water preheater outlet water vapor tension thermostat with

well and flexible armored tubing connected to temperature regulator. Install thermostat in preheater leaving water piping.

4. Exit gas temperature vapor tension thermostat with flexible armored

tubing connected to temperature regulator. Install thermostat in exit flue gas duct.

J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide boiler

economizers of one of the following:

1. Cleaver Brooks; Div. Aqua-Chem, Inc. 2. Kent Tube.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 53 00 – FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT

23 53 00 Feed Water Equipment Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 3

PART 1 PRODUCTS 1.01 DEAERATOR BOILER FEED UNITS

A. General: Provide as indicated, deaerator boiler feed units of capacity as scheduled, consisting of deaerator with required accessories, return surge tank, transfer pumps, boiler feed pumps, electrical control panel, factory-installed piping and wiring, and steel supporting structure. This shall be a dual tank system. The D.A. and condensate return tanks shall have suitable lining.

B. Deaerator: Provide spray heating type, rated to deliver scheduled

capacity containing less than 0.005 cc/1 of dissolved oxygen, and providing 10-minute storage to overflow line.

1. Construct tank in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code, inspected and labeled for 50 psi working pressure. 2. Collect inlet water in surge tank and deliver to deaerators by

vertical condensate transfer pump. 3. Provide reducing valve, to reduce steam from boiler pressure to

operating pressure, and relief valve of capacity exceeding maximum capacity of reducing valve. Provide strainer and 3-valve bypass around reducing valve.

4. Provide heating section with 1 or more inlet spray nozzles, stainless

steel, spring loaded, to discharge at angle to suit heating section of tank. Provide heating section with large access neck at top of tank with opening for gravity returns, and nonferrous, baffled, vent condenser hood attached to inside of cover plate. Provide vent valve.

5. Provide cylindrical deaerating section with concentric steam down

take and heated water down take extending centrally into tank. 6. The pneumatic water inlet valve shall be actuated by level

transmitters controlled by loop controls. This control, in conjunction with the valve, shall be capable of feeding the proper amount of water under all conditions. The operating level span shall be adjustable from one to ten inches, even under 5:100 load swings. The internal control circuitry shall incorporate an adjustable dead zone band so that water bounce does not affect its position.

7. Provide thermometers in heating section and pump suction line,

pressure gage for heating section, and water level gage. 8. Provide high-low level alarm switches with external float cages and

isolating valves. 9. Provide steel structure for supporting components making up

packaged unit. Factory paint unit with hard enamel.



C. Surge Tank: Provide surge (receiver) tank of scheduled capacity, coating.

Size condensate, return opening to receive simultaneous discharge from condensate pumps.

1. The pneumatic water inlet valve shall be actuated by level

transmitters controlled by loop controls. This control, in conjunction with the valve, shall be capable of feeding the proper amount of water under all conditions. The operating level span shall be adjustable from one to ten inches, even under 5:100 load swings. The internal control circuitry shall incorporate an adjustable dead zone band so that water bounce does not affect its position.

2. Provide high-low level alarm switches in external float cages with

isolating valves.

D. Transfer Pumps: Provide vertical duplex centrifugal transfer pumps, bronze fitted construction, packed stuffing box, bronze shaft sleeve, ball bearings; each rated for full deaerator capacity at 30 psi, with flexible coupling to 3500 rpm drip-proof ball bearing motor of same electrical characteristics as boiler feed pumps.

1. Provide interconnecting piping between surge tank, pumps, and

deaerator, with suction and discharge isolating valves, discharge check valve, and recirculating line with pet cock for each pump, to bypass discharge from pump back to surge tank when deaerator feed valve closes.

E. Boiler Feed Pumps: Provide centrifugal type vertical boiler feed pumps of

scheduled capacity. Provide pumps suitable for temperatures involved, and sealing head to deliver required net positive suction head (NPSH). Connect pumps through flexible couplings to drip-proof ball bearing motors.

1. Provide orificed and valved recirculation line from pump discharge

to deaerator storage, to protect pumps when boilers require no water. Provide sealing water piping to stuffing boxes, if required.

2. Pipe pumps through separate lines to pump suction opening of

deaerator, and provide isolating suction valves, suction strainers, discharge pressure gages and manifold.

3. Mount common pump and motor base on steel structure. Factory

wire pumps to control panel.

F. Control Panel: Provide NEMA Type 1 control panel enclosure mounted on steel structure, containing required controls, motor starters, and wiring.

1. Provide for each motor, circuit breaker, magnetic starter with 3

overload relays, and control circuit transformer.



2. Provide start-stop pushbutton station with indicator lights for each pump.

3. Provide alarm bell and high and low level loop controllers for

deaerator and surge tank. Mount transmitters at desirable high and low levels, wired to control panel.

4. Provide external to panel wiring in rigid metal conduit, in

accordance with NEC.

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide deaerators boiler feed units of one of the following:

1. Cleaver-Brooks 2. Domestic Pump ITT

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 64 00- WATER CHILLERS

23 64 00 Water Chillers Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 6


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Trane Company 2. Carrier 3. York

1.02 UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Packaged, factory assembled, centrifugal chiller consisting of a centrifugal compressor, speed increasing gear drive (as required), electric compressor motor, motor starter, evaporator, condenser, controls and panels including accessories.

1.03 COMPONENTS

A. Compressor:

1. Shaft and Impeller Assembly: Carbon, forged steel shaft with cast high strength aluminum alloy impellers, designed and assembled for no critical speeds within operating or test speed range. Assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Shaft and impeller assembly shall be over-speed tested to at least 20% above design operating speeds.

2. Casing: Fine grain cast iron with gasket sealed casing joints. 3. Drive Assembly: Drive shall be direct or through a gear

transmission integral with compressor and lubricated through the compressor lubrication system. Compressor speeds shall not exceed 7000 RPM.

4. Gear Assembly: Gear driven machines shall include a helical gear

set with aluminum alloy bearings, or journal bearings, babbitt lined and pressure lubricated. Provide inspection openings, to facilitate inspection and replacement without disassembly or removal of the compressor casing or impeller.

5. Lubrication System: Forced circulation type, with positive

displacement submerged pump and replaceable filter; complete with an automatic oil heater designed to separate refrigerant from oil. Provide an oil cooler if required for proper performance. System shall provide positive pressure lubrication of journals, bearings and seals, during start-up, operation, and coast-down of chiller, including power interruptions.



6. Motor and Accessories: Provide 2-pole, open or hermetic motor, continuous duty, single speed, squirrel cage, induction type; full load operation of the motor shall not exceed nameplate rating; rotor shaft shall be heat treated steel and designed such that the first critical speed is well above the operating speed. Open type motors shall provide for removal of the starter for service or replacement without breaking the main refrigerant piping connections. Provide temperature sensors imbedded in the motor windings and on the motor bearing journal.

1.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Compressor Motor Starters:

1. The compressor motor starter shall be supplied by the centrifugal chiller manufacturer. Starters shall be Star-Delta, closed transition. Starters shall be enclosed in a free standing NEMA-1 enclosure.

2. Starter shall include a motor protection device incorporating

electronic three phase overloads and current transformers. This electronic motor protection system shall monitor and protect against the following conditions: a) Three-phase overload protection. b) Overload protection during start-up. c) Phase unbalance protection. d) Distribution fault protection consisting of three-phase, current

sensing devices that monitor the status of the starter. Distribution faults of 1-1/2 electrical cycle durations shall be detected and the compressor motor shall be disconnected within six electrical cycles.

3. The starter shall be able to operate in temperatures up to 120

degrees F.

B. Starter Accessories:

1. Provide the following: a) Circuit Breaker - Starter shall contain breaker capable of

breaking currents up to its interruption capacity of 1200 amperes. Operating handle and trip indicator shall be located in the door. This handle shall be capable of being padlocked.

b) Ground Fault Protection - Starter shall provide ground fault protection.

c) Circuit breaker shall trip when the dielectric resistance of the three-phase circuit is significantly reduced in either the starter of the compressor motor. Indication of ground fault shall be located in the door.

d) Reset capability shall be provided in the door of the starter. e) Ammeters - Three ammeters shall be provided, one per

phase. Ammeters shall be calibrated so that inrush current can be indicated.



C. Voltmeters - Three voltmeters shall be provided, each reading a phase to

phase voltage. D. Miscellaneous Motor Starters: Provide all miscellaneous motor starters

factory packaged. Miscellaneous starters shall be across the line single speed non-reversing type, of sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics scheduled; with a NEMA 12 enclosure. Provide starters with an electronic protection system to monitor against three phase overload, overload during starting, phase unbalance, thermal overload, and over and under voltage.

E. Evaporator and Condenser:

1. Shell and Water Boxes: Fabricate from welded carbon steel plate.

Provide 150 PSIG maximum working pressure water boxes and nozzle connections. Unit shall be pressure tested to 1.5 times the design working pressure. Provide vents, drains, and covers in water boxes to permit tube cleaning.

2. Water Heads - Condenser: Fabricate steel water heads with

integral water connections. Weld to tube sheets or vessel assembly. Provide marine type water boxes with removable covers for access to the entire tube sheet without disturbing external water piping. Provide water piping stub-outs from the side of the water box flanged for cut groove connections.

3. Tube Sheet: Fabricate from carbon steel sheets welded to the shell

and drilled for tubes. Provide intermediate tube support sheets as required to prevent tube vibration. Tubes: Provide individually replaceable, 3/4" O.D., seamless copper tubes with wall thickness not less than: 0.035". Tube velocity shall not exceed 12 FPS measured deep inside the tube, not in the tube bell mouth. Tube shall be removable from either end of the heat exchanger without effecting strength and durability of the tube sheets and without causing leakage in adjacent tubes. Expand ends of tubes in the tube sheets and intermediate tube support sheets for tight fit to prevent vibration of the tubes. Provide evaporator liquid eliminators the full length of the shell above the tubes to prevent entrainment of liquid. Provide a baffle in the condenser to prevent direct impingement of discharge gas on the tube bundle. Refrigerant circuits shall have a spring-loaded safety relief valve in series with a rupture disc, and a dial pressure gage between the relief valve and the rupture disc to indicate disc damage. Provide sub-cooling system fabricated internally with condenser and located in the bottom of the condenser shell.

4. Purge System: Unit shall have an automatic thermal purge system

to remove air and other non-condensables from the system and for condensing, separating and returning refrigerant to the system. Provide all necessary devices to automatically isolate the purge system from the chiller.



F. Refrigerant Compatibility:

1. The unit shall be provided with a full charge of R-123 or R-134A. 2. All components of the chiller must be 100 percent compatible with

the refrigerant.

G. Controls and Safeties

1. Refrigerant Flow Control Devices: Provide refrigerant flow control devices between the evaporator and condenser (and elsewhere as required) to regulate refrigerant flow at volume and pressure required to maintain evaporator liquid refrigerant at level sufficient to keep cooler heat transfer tubes adequately wetted through the full range of chiller operation. Design devices to permit chiller operation at scheduled conditions, and to allow condenser entering water of one degree Fahrenheit the return chilled water temperature. Provide an analog output signal to modulate a flow control valve (valve by others) on the condenser water circuit to achieve the specified approach, as required.

2. Capacity Control: Capacity control shall be designed and

fabricated to regulate evaporator leaving water temperature. Design for a capacity modulation range, from full load to 15 percent of full load under normal operating conditions, without entering a surge condition, overshooting and without hunting at any load condition within the required range.

3. Provide variable inlet guide vanes or movable diffuser blocks to

provide stable operation without surge, cavitation or vibration from 100 to 15 percent of full load capacity minimizing the use of hot gas bypass. The manufacture shall indicate on the bid form at what % of load that hot gas flows to the evaporator while maintaining design water temperatures.

4. Safety Controls: Design controls to stop compressor motor in the

event of:

a) High pressure differential in chilled water and condenser water.

b) High condenser pressure. c) Low evaporator temperature and pressure. d) Low chilled water temperature. e) High temperature of bearings and of motor winding. f) Low oil pressure. g) High oil temperature. h) High compressor discharge temperature. i) Low condenser water supply temperatures.

5. Include anti-recycle timer, factory wired to the control panel, limiting

compressor motor restarts.



6. Operational Controls: Provide a complete microprocessor based

control system, factory wired and operational. The microprocessor based control system shall, at a minimum, provide operational as specified hereinafter.

7. Provide an adjustable demand limit control. Demand limit control

shall provide an adjustable rate at which the chiller is allowed to load by continuously monitoring motor amperage and adjusting the inlet vane or diffuser.

8 Provide an automatic adjustable low load cutout to permit chiller

shutdown at the designated load and provide an automatic restart on an increase in load.

9. Provide controls to ensure that compressor will start only under

unloaded conditions. 10. Provide sequencing controls to ensure lubrication of compressor

motor bearings and seals. Sequence as follows:

a) Run lubrication system oil so that compressor motor bearing is lubricated before start up.

b) Start compressor motor. c) Provide lubrication during coast-down after compressor

motor is shut-down.

11. Provide a diagnostic system capable of indicating all lockout conditions, recording the elapsed time (pre-alarm to alarm), the operating condition of the compressor motor (amperes), refrigerant temperatures and pressures and chilled and condenser water temperatures (entering and leaving) at the time of the lockout.

12. Provide control panel factory mounted and wired. Provide gauge, or

alpha numeric display to indicate refrigerant pressure in the evaporator and condenser and oil pressure. Provide on-automatic switches designed to permit; the manual and automatic operation of the oil pump, the manual and automatic operation of the oil separator heater.

13. Provide visual indication of; oil pump operation, low chilled water

temperature cutout, low water flow cutout, oil separator heater operation, low evaporator refrigerant pressure or temperature cutout, high condenser pressure cutout, High motor winding temperature cutout, low oil pressure cutout and motor overload cutout.

14. Provide an elapsed time meter designed to automatically record

chiller operating time in hours. 15. Provide a start counter to automatically record the number of times

the chiller is started.



16. Interface to the Building Management System: Provide Building

Management System (BMS) Interface, allowing full microprocessor to microprocessor communication. All chiller control, monitor and alarm points shall be fully accessible through the BMS. The interface shall consist of all required hardware, software and communications cabling.

H. Insulation: All external insulation will be field applied. I. Finish: Factory applied, baked on alkyd enamel coating on assembled

chiller, including ferrous metal surfacand factory installed insulation. J. Vibration Isolation: Refer to other sections of these specifications for

specific requirements. K. Source Quality Control:

1. Test and Inspect: Test and inspect centrifugal chillers in

accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Performance Verification: Chiller performance shall be rayed and

certified in accordance with ARI 550 "Standard for Centrifugal or Rotary Water Chilling Packages", latest version.

3. Vibration: Compressor shall be run-tested at the factory. Vibration

shall not exceed 1.0 mil at the bearings. Provide a written report of the vibration tests.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 73 00 AIR HANDLING UNITS

23 73 00 Air Handling Units Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 4

PART 1: GENERAL All air handling units and related return /exhaust fans shall be designed with a minimum of 20% additional capacity for future use. Units schedule should reflect present and future capacity as well as the minimum outside air required. All Air handling units are of the draw-trough type and shall be of the following Construction:

A. Fan Section: The fan shall be direct drive with airfoil blades and a premium efficiency motor (min. 94%). Fan bearings shall be ball or roller type. The fan, motor, and drive shall be internally spring isolated on a structural steel base complete with flex connections, lateral restraint. Fan performance shall be based on tests run in an AMCA certified laboratory as administered in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and 300-85. The wheel shall be constructed to AMCA class standards as applicable for the scheduled duty. Provide motor removal rail. All fans shall be supplied complete with a variable speed drive VFD with bypass. The VFD together with all options and modifications shall mount within a standard NEMA-1 enclosure and shall be UL/ETL approved and labeled. The fan section shall have full size access door and adjacent removable panel for maintenance access.

B. Base Construction: Base frame assembly shall be fabricated from a

minimum of 16 ga. galvanized and bonderized steel, and shall have a minimum of four lifting lugs per shipped section. The structural base frame shall be fitted with cross members to support all interior components. The minimum height of all bases shall be at least 8" (eight inches) high. The floor shall be a double bottom construction of galvanized steel 16 ga. outer and 10 ga. inner with 4" (four inch) fiberglass between.

C. Cabinet Construction: Double wall construction with roof and floors

fabricated with a rustproof, arc-welded, tubular steel frame. The panels shall be fabricated of 16 ga. solid steel. The insulation shall be installed in such a manner as not to be disturbed if panels are removed. Insulation fill shall be a minimum of 4” (four inch) thick dual density fiberglass, the coefficient shall meet or exceed a 3.0 P.C.F. density material rating. The insulation shall be UL 723 fire and smoke rated. Insulation shall have WHITE mat facing that shall not promote microbial growth per ASTM C 655 and shall be tested and rated per ASTM C 423 and NFPA-90A. Insulation shall have thermal conductivity K factor of .23 btu/hr/sqft/degree F at 75 degrees F mean.

D. Access Doors: Access doors shall be included between each air handler

component. Access doors shall be full height and 4” (four inches) thick, double wall, insulated, and thermally-broke. Exterior and interior door skin



shall be constructed from minimum of 16 gauge galvanized solid steel. Door insulation shall be 4”, 3 P.C.F. density. Each access door shall have a 12”x12” thermally-broke view window. Door hinges shall be bolted to the unit and made with corrosion resistant materials. Hinge shall have stainless steel removable pin. Door latch and paw assembly shall be industrial quality and corrosion resistant with handle on both inside and outside of the door. Latches and paw assembly shall be one piece and bolted together. Positively pressurized sections shall have inwardly swinging doors, while negatively pressurized doors shall swing outward.

E. Coil Sections: Coil sections shall be separated by a minimum space of 18"

(eighteen inches). Each coil section shall have a full size access door. Coil casings shall be fabricated from 16 ga., 304 stainless steel. Removable panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler unit, not just on the coil removal side. All coils shall be ARI 410 certified and constructed with .025” thick brazed replaceable return bends. Same end connections are required. Headers shall be non ferrous seamless copper. All coils shall be drainable with no trapped tubes.

F. Drain Pans: Drain pans shall be double sloped condensate “IAQ” type,

fabricated from 304, 16 gauge stainless steel and shall extend the entire length of the coil section, and extend in the direction of airflow a minimum of 6” beyond the edge of the coil with a minimum edge height of 2”. Drain pans shall be double wall insulated and shall have the drain connection the same side of coil connection.

G. Lights: Lights shall be provided in each section that has service access. A

single switch shall be provided to operate lights. H. Filter Section: Filter sections shall be equipped with access doors of

adequate size to remove and replace the filters. A fully recessed magnahelic gauge shall be mounted on the outside of the cabinet with copper probes measuring the pressure drop across the filter section.

I. Mixing box/economizer section: Mixing box section shall be complete with

opposed blade dampers, linkage, and actuators. Maximum damper pressure drop shall be .15” water column. Maximum air velocity across damper shall be 1500 FPM. All damper shall be constructed with 16 gauge galvanized steel frames, and shall be certified for air leakage of less than six CFM per square foot at 4”wg. of differential pressure. Unit shall have two outside air dampers with one of them dedicated for minimum outside air requirement.

J. Damper Actuators: Electric or Pneumatic



1. Electric actuator motor shall be 24 or 120 volt, two positions or

modulating as required with spring return type and size to operate the damper with sufficient reserve power for smooth operation from full close to full open and tight shut off.

2. Pneumatic operator type, rolling-diagraph, piston type with

adjustable stop and spring return, size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action of two-position action. Where actuators operate in sequence, provide pilot petitioners.

K. Air Blenders : Where needed, all units shall be factory built and tested.

Maximum allowable pressure drop of blender shall be 0.3” water column. Blender shall be fabricated of 0.08” thick aluminum, all welded construction. Provide angle reinforcement on all units above 30” diameter. Blender shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

L. Air handler shall be designed and manufactured in strict accordance with

UL 1995, Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment. Air handler shall be ETL or UL listed in accordance with UL 1995, and shall carry the ETL or UL label. If manufacturer cannot provide ETL/UL sticker on air handler, it shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor to arrange for local, on-site, ETL or UL approval and labeling.

M. Heat Recovery Wheel

Acceptable Manufacturers a) Semco b) Venmar c) Thermotech

N. UV Lights Acceptable Manufacturers a) American Ultraviolet Company b) Sterile Air

O. Variable Frequency Drive (See Electrical Standards)



PART 2. PRODUCT

A. Air Handling Units.

Subject to strict compliance with the requirement as described above in part 1, provide units by one of the following:

1. Energy lab. 2. TMI Custom Air Systems 3. Ventrol 4. Haakon Industries

B. Fans

Provide fans by one of the following:

1. Twin City - APQ 2. Green Heck (Plenum Fan) 3. Fanwall Technology (Huntair). 4. Loren Cook (Plenum Fan).

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 74 -- - ROOF TOP UNITS

23 74 00 Roof Top Units Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 6

PART 1: PRODUCTS 1.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: subject to strict compliance with the requirements as given hereafter, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aaon, Inc. 2. Venmare 3. Carrier (Centurion Model) 4. Mamoth

1.02 ROOFTOP UNITS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, gas heater, filters and dampers.

B. Construction:

1. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired and

shipped in one section. 2. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor roof top application

with fully weatherproof cabinet. 3. Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of G90 galvanized steel with

the exterior constructed of 18 gauge or heavier material and Interior 20 gauge.

4. The unit roof shall be sloped or cross-broken to assure drainage. 5. Unit specific color-coded wiring diagrams shall match the unit color-

coded wiring and will be provided in both points to point and ladder form.

6. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed

inside the control compartment. 7. Access to filters, blowers, heating section, and other items needing

periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn latches. Door fastening screws are not acceptable.



8. Access doors shall have stainless steel hinges and full perimeter gasketing.

9. All opening through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned

flanges of at least ½” in height around the opening through the base pan.

10. Air side service access doors shall have rain overhangs. 11. All access doors shall have an internal metal liner to protect the

door ½” thick, 1 1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation. 12. The interior air side of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all

exterior panels with 1” thick, 1½ lb. Density fiberglass insulation. 13. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging,

service areas and caution areas. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit.

14. Other cabinet features shall be as follows

a) Double wall insulation liners with solid metal on both side of liners

b) Base pan insulation for units not mounted on a curb. c) Unit shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel drain pan.

C. Supply Fans:

1. Blowers shall be entirely self contained with easy access for service and maintenance.

2. All belt drive blowers shall have backward inclined airfoil blades. 3. All direct drive blowers shall have forward curved blades. 4. Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with minimum ratings of

140% of the motor nameplate brake horsepower when the adjustable pulley is at the minimum RPM.

5. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced.



D. Outside air package:

1. Unit shall have a fully modulating, enthalpy-controlled economizer with multistage integrated economizer and compressor operation for maximum benefit. The economizer shall consist of a motor operated outdoor air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 4 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2” w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down on power failure. Economizer shall have DDC signal control connection capability.

E. Air cooled condenser:

1. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge

axial flow direct drive fans. Direct drive fans shall be directly connected to and supported by motor shaft.

2. The condenser coils shall be sloped at least 30 degrees to protect

the coils from damage. 3. Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins

mechanically bonded to the tubes and with a backed on phenolic corrosion resistant coating.

4. Condenser coils to be sized for a minimum of 10 degrees F of

refrigerant sub-cooling.

F. Filters:

1. On rooftop units 3 to 15 ton, filters shall be 4” thick fiberglass pleated throwaway type with ASHRAE efficiency of 30 %. On 16 to 30 ton units filters shall be 4” thick with minimum efficiency of 65 %. All units shall be equipped with a clogged filter switch and a direct dial magnehelic gauge mounted in the control compartment.



G. Evaporator coils:

1. Coils shall be copper tubes with copper fins that are finished with a phenolic coating and equalizing type vertical tube headers. Coils shall be furnished with a thermostatic expansion valve and a double sloped drain pan for positive drainage. Coil drain pan shall be fabricated of 304 stainless steel. Coil shall have 304 stainless steel end casings.

H. Refrigeration system:

1. Compressors shall be scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on vibration isolators.

2. All units over 7 ton shall be multistage and shall have a minimum of

2 stages of capacity control. 3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment and

away from the base pan and supply air. 4. System shall be equipped with a thermostatic expansion valve,

automatic reset low-pressure and manual reset high-pressure refrigerant controls.

5. Unit shall be equipped with the following:

a) Service fittings for low and high-pressure sides. b) Refrigerant liquid line dryers. c) Factory fully charged with refrigerant. d) Hot gas bypass. e) Liquid line sight glasses. f) Each compressor shall be individually staged for capacity

control. g) 5 minutes anti-short cycle delay timer for each stage. h) 20 seconds between stage delay timers for each stage. i) Low ambient control to zero degrees. j) Each compressor shall be equipped with suction and

discharge service valves.



I. Gas heat section:

1. Unit shall heat using natural gas and be equipped with a modulating gas valve; adjustable speed combustion blower and stainless steel tubular heat exchanger. The heat exchanger shall have a 25 years non pro-rated warranty. The completely factory mounted gas heating assembly shall be capable of operating at any firing rate between 100 % and 30 % of rated capacity. A discharge air sensor shall be provided for field installation in the supply duct to sense discharge air temperature, which should be adjustable at the electronic controller within the rooftop unit control compartment. Heating control shall be initiated via: a) A”W1” call for heat from a thermostat. b) A 0 to 10 volts signal from a DDC control system.

J. Controls:

1. Unit shall be equipped with hot gas by-pass control on the lead refrigeration stage to protect against evaporator frosting at low air flows and suction pressures.

2. Unit shall be equipped with morning warm up thermostat controller

and a night set back temperature controller with a cooling lockout function.

3. Factory installed DDC controls by others.

K. Smoke Detectors: ( Units with capacity of 2000 CFM and larger)

1. Unit shall be provided with smoke detectors sensing in both the

supply and return air portion of the unit wired to shut off the unit control circuit.

L. Firestat: ( Unit with capacity smaller than 2000 CFM )

1. Unit shall be provided with firestats sensing in both the supply and

return air portion of the unit wired to shut off the unit control circuit.



M. Power:

1. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired external disconnect.

2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut

down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on the voltage, or the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal.

3. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and field wired 115

volts, 15-amp ground fault service receptacle.

N. Roof Curbs:

1. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit.

2. Unit shall be mounted on a factory furnished acoustical style solid

bottom roof curb, fully lined with 1” of neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation and with a wood nailer strip. The curb shall be adjustable up to ¾” per foot to allow for a sloped roof where applicable.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 81 00 - PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

23 81 00 Package Air Conditioning Unit Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 1

A. In General rooms with heat producing equipment such as Communication Room, Computer Room, and control room next to procedure room should be provided with supplemental Air conditioning Unit. The Unit should be selected if possible with dual compressor. Each compressor should be able to handle 70% of the load, in case one compressor fails unit is capable of providing 70% of its cooling capacity.

B. In case supplemental unit cannot have dual compressor room should be

design with a stand by cooling system from the building HVAC system. In case room Air conditioning Unit fails controls should be design to provide cooling from the building HVAC system.

C. Use roof mounted Air-cooled condenser / Glycol system should be

considered. In case of water cooled system is used the city water should be protected with double back flow preventor.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Liebert 2. Stulz Air Technology System

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 84 00 - HUMIDIFICATION

23 84 00 Humidification Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 1 of 2

Part 1: General 1.01 Design

A. The design engineer shall discuss the selection of humidification system type (spray, steam, other ) with the Facilities Development resident Mechanical Engineer, prior to starting the design.

B. Hospital area, shall have minimum of 35% minimum humidity level except

for special areas such as, but not limited to O.R and Procedure rooms where humidity range is 35% to 60% requiring booster humidifiers.

C. Medical Office Buildings on or off site shall maintain a minimum relative

humidity of 35%.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 Material and Components

A. General: except as otherwise indicated, provide packaged humidifiers and ancillary equipment with manufacturer’s standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, design and constructed by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation.

2.02 Jacketed Dry Steam Humidifiers

A. General: provide jacketed dry steam humidifiers as indicated of size and capacity as scheduled.

B. Separator: Provide cast-iron separator to receive, normally closed steam

at operating pressure and to ensure dry steam entering the metering valve. Provide mounting flange for distribution manifold.

C. Meeting Valve: Provide stainless steel construction, normally closed

steam jacketed metering valve, with linear flow characteristics over full stroke.

1. Valve actuator: Pneumatic 4 to 11 psi. reverse operating with pilot

positioner

D. Provide temperature switch to prevent the humidifier to operation until start up condensate is drained and the entire unit is up to steam.

Jones Lang LaSalle @ Beaumont Health System DESIGN/CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS SECTION 23 84 00 - HUMIDIFICATION

23 84 00 Humidification Issued 6/30/04 Revised 10/17/11 Page 2 of 2

E. Distribution temperature manifold: Provide stainless steel manifold with provision to return any condensate to steam trap. Construct with steam nozzles shall be stainless steel and designed to provide even steam distribution over the entire length from 0 to 100% capacity. Provide stainless steel mounting plate for duct attachment and mounting flange for separator attachment.

F. Trap: Provide float and thermostatic of inverted bucket steam trap sized

for maximum condensate and inlet strainer if not integral with the trap. G. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong 2. Dri-steam 3. Nortec Industries Inc.